dop-hmi manuel tr

442
DOP Serisi HMI Kullanma Klavuzu Icindekiler Bolum 1 Giris 1-1 DOP-A Serisi Dokunmatik Operator Panelleri..........................................................1-1 1-2 Ozellikler ....................................................................................................................1-1 1-3 Model numarasi...........................................................................................................1-2 1-4 Uyari.... .......................................................................................................................1-3 Bolum 2 Scredit 'e Giris 2-1 Ekran duzenleyici Setup ..............................................................................................2-1 2-2 Ekran Duzenliyiciye Baslama......................................................................................2-5 2-3 Menu bar ve toolbar ....................................................................................................2-10 2-3-1 File ........................................................................................................................2-10 2-3-2 Edit........................................................................................................................2-29 2-3-3 View......................................................................................................................2-53 2-3-4 Element.................................................................................................................2-68 2-3-5 Screen...................................................................................................................2-88 2-3-6 Tools.....................................................................................................................2-105 2-3-7 Option...................................................................................................................2-122 2-3-8 Windows...............................................................................................................2-145 2-3-9 Help.......................................................................................................................2-164 Bolum 3 Element Fonksiyonlari 3-1 Element Nasil Secilir..................................................................................................3-1 3-2 Button Element...........................................................................................................3-3 3-3 Meter...........................................................................................................................3-23 3-4 Bar...............................................................................................................................3-27 3-4-1 Normal Bar.........................................................................................................3-27 3-4-2 Deviation Bar.....................................................................................................3-30 3-5 Pie Graph.....................................................................................................................3-34 3-6 Indicator.......................................................................................................................3-37 3-7 Data display.................................................................................................................3-42 3-8 Graph Display..............................................................................................................3-49 3-8-1 State graphic.......................................................................................................3-49 3-8-2 Animated graphic...............................................................................................3-51 3-9 Input............................................................................................................................3-53 3-10 Curve.........................................................................................................................3-59 3-11 Sampling...................................................................................................................3-65 3-12 Alarm........................................................................................................................3-73 3-13 Graphics....................................................................................................................3-76 3-13-1 Line..................................................................................................................3-76 3-13-2 Rectangle..........................................................................................................3-77 3-13-3 Circle................................................................................................................3-78 3-13-4 Polygon............................................................................................................3-78 3-13-5 Arc....................................................................................................................3-79 3-13-6 Text...................................................................................................................3-79 3-13-7 Scale.................................................................................................................3-80 3-13-8 Table.................................................................................................................3-81

Upload: cetin-oezben

Post on 04-Nov-2014

147 views

Category:

Documents


2 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

DOP Serisi HMI Kullanma Klavuzu Icindekiler

Bolum 1 Giris 1-1 DOP-A Serisi Dokunmatik Operator Panelleri..........................................................1-1 1-2 Ozellikler ....................................................................................................................1-1 1-3 Model numarasi...........................................................................................................1-2 1-4 Uyari.... .......................................................................................................................1-3 Bolum 2 Scredit 'e Giris 2-1 Ekran duzenleyici Setup ..............................................................................................2-1 2-2 Ekran Duzenliyiciye Baslama......................................................................................2-5 2-3 Menu bar ve toolbar ....................................................................................................2-10 2-3-1 File ........................................................................................................................2-10 2-3-2 Edit........................................................................................................................2-29 2-3-3 View......................................................................................................................2-53 2-3-4 Element.................................................................................................................2-68 2-3-5 Screen...................................................................................................................2-88 2-3-6 Tools.....................................................................................................................2-105 2-3-7 Option...................................................................................................................2-122 2-3-8 Windows...............................................................................................................2-145 2-3-9 Help.......................................................................................................................2-164 Bolum 3 Element Fonksiyonlari 3-1 Element Nasil Secilir..................................................................................................3-1 3-2 Button Element...........................................................................................................3-3 3-3 Meter...........................................................................................................................3-23 3-4 Bar...............................................................................................................................3-27 3-4-1 Normal Bar.........................................................................................................3-27 3-4-2 Deviation Bar.....................................................................................................3-30 3-5 Pie Graph.....................................................................................................................3-34 3-6 Indicator.......................................................................................................................3-37 3-7 Data display.................................................................................................................3-42 3-8 Graph Display..............................................................................................................3-49 3-8-1 State graphic.......................................................................................................3-49 3-8-2 Animated graphic...............................................................................................3-51 3-9 Input............................................................................................................................3-53 3-10 Curve.........................................................................................................................3-59 3-11 Sampling...................................................................................................................3-65 3-12 Alarm........................................................................................................................3-73 3-13 Graphics....................................................................................................................3-76 3-13-1 Line..................................................................................................................3-76 3-13-2 Rectangle..........................................................................................................3-77 3-13-3 Circle................................................................................................................3-78 3-13-4 Polygon............................................................................................................3-78 3-13-5 Arc....................................................................................................................3-79 3-13-6 Text...................................................................................................................3-79 3-13-7 Scale.................................................................................................................3-80 3-13-8 Table.................................................................................................................3-81

Page 2: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Bolum 4 Macro 4-1 Macro Tipi .............................................................................................................4-2 4-2 Macro Basimi.........................................................................................................4-4 4-3 Macro Uygulamasi ................................................................................................4-20 4-4 Hata mesajlari .......................................................................................................4-56 Bolum 5 Sistem Kontrol 5-1 Kontrol Bolgesi.....................................................................................................5-2 5-2 Durum ..................................................................................................................5-6 5-3 Dahili Hafiza ........................................................................................................5-10 Ek A Yukleme A-1 Ozellikler...............................................................................................................A-1 A-2 Olculer ve Profil....................................................................................................A-5 A-3 Kurulum................................................................................................................A-10 Ek B Haberlesme B-1 Pin baglanti uclari.................................................................................................B-1-1 B-2 Yukleme kablosu .................................................................................................B-1-4 B-3 HMI ve kontrolorlar ile haberlesme ayarlari ve baglanti sekilleri........................B-1-5

Page 3: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

1-1

BOLUM 1 GIRIS

1-1 DOP-A Serisi Dokunmatik Operator Paneli DELTA DOP-A serisini aldiginiz icin tesekkurler. Yuksek hizli donanima sahip DOP-A

serisi kullanicilara kullanisli ve kolay programlanabilir bir arayuz temin etmektedir.

1-2 Ozellikler

Destekledigi PLC Modelleri

DOP-A serisi operator panelleri icinde; Delta,Omron,Simens,Mitsubishi gibi mar- kalarin bulundugu 20'yi askin PLC modelini desteklemektedir. Sizin istekleriniz dogrul-

tusunda yeni PLC modelleri icin uygun haberlesme protokolleri internet sitemizde

surekli guncellenmektedir.

Dil Secenekleri Basitlestirilmis Cince,geleneksel Cince ve Ingilizce'nin yaninda ekran edito-

ru tum Windows® fontlarinida kullanabilmektedir.

Hizli Uygulama ve Haberlesme Makrolari uick execution and communication macro

DOP-A serisi makrolari kullanarak karisik islemleri yapilabilmekte,ayrica haberles-

e makrolari kullanilarak ozel cihazlarla comport'dan haberlesebilmek icin haberlesme

protokolleri yazilabilmektedir.

USB ile Hizli upload/download

USB Ver1.1'i kullanarak kisa surede upload/download yapilabilmektedir.

Recete

DOP-A serisi kullanicilara bircok recetenin kolayca girilip saklanabildigi microsoft

exceldekine benzer bir recete editoru sunmaktadir.(Hafiza 64K)

Page 4: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

1-2

2 Adet PLC Baglantisi

2 COM portlu yapisi ile ayni anda iki farkli veya ayni PLC ile baglanti yapma imkani.

Cesitli kontrolor baglantisi

COM2 portu ile RS485 kullanilarak bircok controlor ile baglanti yapilabilir.

(diger cihazlar RS485'i desteklemelidir.)

On-line Simulasyon

Derlemeyi bitirdikten sonra kontrolore baglanarak PC 'den simule etme imkani

sunar.

Off-line Simulasyon

Derlemeyi bitirdikten sonra programi direk PC ile simule etme imkani sunar.(Kontrolora gerek duymaz)

SMC Kart ile Yedekleme

Bilgisayar kullanmadan SMC karta download edilebilir veya SMC karti baska

bir HMI 'ya takarak kopyalanabilir. Gecmis bilgileri ve alarm kayitlari SMC kartta

saklanip kart okuyucuyla okunup print edilebilir.

Bircok Guvenlik Korumasi

Password secenekleri ile programlayicinin yazdiklarini koruma ve makina

kullaniminda kullanici izin seviyelerini ayarlama imkani sunar.

1-3 Model numarasi

Page 5: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

1-3

Giris gucu

DOP A 57 GS T D -

D: DCA: ACArayuz TipiT: Sadece dokunmatikK:Dokunmatik ve Tuslu

Panel TipiGS: STN GriCS: STN renkliTC: TFT renkli

Panel Olculeri57: 5.7"75: 7.5"10: 10.4"

A: A series ~ USB, RS-232, RS-485, RS-422

Delta Operator Panel

Seri

Urun Adi

1-4 Uyari

Cevresel faktorler (sicaklik ve nem)

Net bir goruntu elde etmek icin parlaklik ve kontrast ayarini asagidaki ortam ko-

sullarina gore yapiniz. Eger uygulama sinirlarin disinda ise,uzun sure sonunda ekran

degisken tonlarda gorunmeye baslayacaktir.

Uygulama cevresel sicakligi: 0 ºC to 50 ºC (32 ºF to 122 ºF) Bagil nem: 10% ~ 90%

SMC Kart

SMC karti datalari saklamak ve tasimak icin kullanilabilir. Yalnizca; HMI tarafindan

formatlanmis SMC karti hem HMI 'da hemde Windows® OS sisteminde kullanila-

bilir.(SMC kart bazi farkli formatlarlada yazilip okunabilir fakat bazi problemlerle

karsilasilabilir)

Uygulama esnasinda Comport'a kabloyu takip cikarmayin!

Lutfen enerjiyi kestikten comport baglantimizi sokelim veya takalim.

Tavsiye edilen sistem gereksinimleri Pentium III, 500MHz veya ustu 256MB RAM Windows® 2000 & 98

Page 6: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-1

Bolum 2 Scredit 'e Giris

2-1 Scredit Setup

Bu bolumde ekran duzenleyicinin genel olarak ozellikleri anlatilacaktir.

Ilerleyen bolumlerde bu programin detaylari anlatilacaktir.

n Minimum hardware gereksinimleri 1. 80486 veya ustu PC 2. 16 MB RAM

3. 10 MB bos hard disk alani 4. VGA or super VGA monitor. Windows 'da ekran renk ayarlarini 256 renk veya

ustune ayarlayiniz.5. Windows uyumlu mouse.

6. Windows uyumlu printer.

n Software yuklemesiDelta HMI Sc reen Editor setup 'ina baslamak icin, lutfen asagidaki stepleri takip ediniz.

1.Adim: Lutfen PC 'nizde Win98 /NT/XP/2000 sistemlerinden birini calistirin. (Sek. 2-1-1 )

Sekil. 2-1-1 Microsoft Windows baslatin

Page 7: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-2

2.Adim: Kurulum CD 'sini CD ROM 'a takin ve setup.exe 'yi calistirin. click Start > Calistir. ( Fig. 2 -1 -2)

Not : Eger kurulum sirasinda calisan baska programlar varsa lutfen onlari kapatin

Sekil. 2 -1 -2 Windows 'un altinda setup.exe 'in calistirilmasi3.Adim: OK bastiktan sonra setup baslayacaktir.Gelen d'alog kutularini takip e-

derek kuruluma devam edin ve kurulumun yapilacagi yeri secin.

Default klasoru sectikten sonra C: \Program file \Delta\Screen editor , click Next>. Setup islemi sonucunda Program secilen klasore kurulmus olacaktir.

Defult klasorunden baska bir klasor secmek icin , click Browse ... Ekrana gelen

klasorler icinden istediginiz bir tanesini icine Delta HMI scredit programini kurmak icin secin ve OK ' e daha sonra Next>

Eger gerekirse, Back tusu ile adimlari tek tek geri alabilirsiniz.

Page 8: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-3

Sekil 2-1-3 Screen editor kurulumu icin klasor secimi

4.Adim: Bu dialog kutucugunda dili secebilirsiniz: Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese veya English.Daha sonra N ext> basarak

diger adimlara gecilebilir.

Sekil. 2-1-4 Dil secimi5.Adim: Bu adimda gelen dialog kutucugu gerekli dosyalarin sisteminize yuklen-

digini gosterecektir (Sekil 2-1-5 ve Sekil 2-1-6)

Page 9: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-4

Sekil. 2 -1-5 Screen editor yuklenmesi

Sekil. 2-1-6 Screen editoru yuklemeyi bitirStep 6: Artik kurulum islemini bitirebilirsiniz. Lutfen islemi sonlandirmak icin Finish

tusuna basin. (Sekil 2 -1 -7)

Sekil 2 -1 -7 Yuklemeden cikis

Page 10: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-5

7.Adim: OK basip setup'in bilgisayarinizi restart yapmasini bekleyin.Aksi tak-

de “No, I will restart my computer later" a basin. Fakat Delta HMIscredit programini kullanmak icin bir defa restart yapmaniz gerektigini unut-

mayin.

2-2 Scredit 'e Baslama

Setup 'un sonra,Scredit 'i acmak icin su adimlari takip edin; click Start >

Programs > Delta HMI > Screen Editor. Sekil 2 -2 -1)

Sekil 2-2-1

Sekil 2 -2-2 Baslangic displayi

Screen editor 'e basladiginizda ,

1. Eger enviorement menusunden "auto open last file automatically" sec

Page 11: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-6

tiyseniz son actiginiz program otomatik olarak acilacaktir.

2. Eger “auto open last file automatically” isaretlemdiyseniz veya son calisma-

nizi saklamadiysaniz, sekildeki gibi acilacaktir. (Sekil 2-2 -3)

Sekil 2-2-3 Sayfa acilmamis ekranYeni dosya actiktan sonra sekil 2-2-4 gozuken Screen editor sayfasi acilacaktir

Page 12: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-7

Sekil. 2 -2 -4 Screen editor 'de yeni dosya sayfasi

Screen editor uygulama sayfasi asagida anlatilan 5 bolumden olusmaktadir.

n Menu bar 8 farkli fonksiyon icermektedir.

n Toolbar Toolbar; Windows® programindaki gibidir,yerlerini siz belirliyebilirsiniz.

1. Standard toolbar

2. Zoom toolbar

3. Text toolbar

4. Upper-level planning toolbar

5. Lower-level planning toolbar

Page 13: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-8

Sekil 2-2-5

Sekil 2 -2 -6

Menu bar

Property tablosu

Output tablosu

Standart toolbar

Element toolbar

Zoom toolbar Text toolbar

Status bar

Element listesi

Konum

Text toolbar

Element toolbar

Standart

toolbar

Zoom toolbar

Property tablosu

Output sayfasiMenu bar

Alt sira

planlama toolbar

Ust sira

planlama toolbar

Ust sira

planlama toolbar

Alt sira

planlama toolbar

Page 14: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-9

n Element ozellik (property) tablosu

Secilen nesnenin ozelliklerini ayarlamak icin kullanilir.(bkz.Bolum3)

Fig. 2-2-7 Property tablosu Fig. 2-2 -8 Pro perty listesi

Sekil 2 -2-9 Durum

n Output Penceresi Ekranda yapilan isler ayric compile isleminden sonraki mesajlar burda

gozukur. Yazilan program compile edilirken Scredit otomatik olarak hatalari

denetler. Bir hata buldugunda ilgili hataya ait mesaj output window 'da go- runtulenir. Kullanici hata mesajina tiklayarak hatali elementi gorebilir.

Fig. 2-2-10 Output sayfasi

Calisma (Work) bolgesiProgramin yapildigi bolgedir.(buton,grafik.sekil).Guzel bir calisma icin asagidaki ornekleri takip edin.(Sekil 2 -2-11 ).

Fig. 2-2-8

Fig. 2-2-9

Page 15: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-10

Sekil 2 -2-11 Screen editor uygulamasinin genel gorunusu.

2-3 Menu bar ve toolbar

Screen editor 'un icedigi araclarin oldugu toolbarlardir ( resim,recete,display araclari)Menu toolbar asagidaki secenekleri icirir.

2-3-1 File

Calisma bolgesi

Page 16: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-11

Fig. 2-3-1 Dosya secenekleriYeni bir dosya acmak.

: Yeni bir dosya acmak icin New butonuna basin.

, File> New Sekil 2 -3-2 'deki gibi,veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl+N 'e basin.

Sekil 2-3-2 Menu bar 'dan yeni dosya acmak

Aplication edition

Upload files

Print function

Exit Screen editor

Last file path

Password pr otect

Export a file

Download firmware

Page 17: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-12

Sekil 2-3 -3 Toolbar 'dan yeni dosya acmak

Yeni dosyayi sectikten sonra ekrana gelen Sekil 2-3-4 'deki dialog kutucuguna uygulamaismi,sayfa ismi,sayfa ID ve HMI tipini yazmaliyiz.

Sekil 2-3-4 Yeni uygulama dialog kutucuguEger bir uygulama uzerinde calisirken baska bir uygulama acmak istiyorsaniz asagidaki

gibi size uygulamanizi saklamanizi hatirlatan bir dialog kutucugu belirecektir.

Yeni calisma

Page 18: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-13

Sekil 2-3-5 Uygulama saklama dialog kutucugu

Eski bir uygulama acmak

: Varolan bir uygulamayi acmak icin Open secin

, File> Open (Sekil2-3-7) veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl+O 'a basin

Sekil 2-3-6 Menu bardan acmak

Open old application

Page 19: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-14

Sekil 2-3 -7 Toolbardan acmak

Bu sirada uzerinde calistiginiz uygulamyi saklamaniz icin bir hatirlatici kutucuk acilir sakladiktan sonra sekildeki pencere belirir (Sekil 2-3-8)

Sekil2-3-8 Varolan uygulamayi acmak

Dosyayi kapatmak

Varolan dosyayi acmak

Page 20: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-15

: Dosyayi kapatmak icin File > Close Sekil 2-3-9

Sekil 2-3-9 Uygulamayi kapat

Eger uygulama kapatilmadan once saklanmadiysa asagidaki dialog kutucugu belirir. Sekil 2 -3-10) ve size saklamaniz gerektigini hatirlatir.

Sekil 2 -3 -10 Saklama dialog kutucugu

Sakla:

Calismalarinizi saklamak icin , basin veya File > Save Sekil 2 -3 -11 , veya

klavye kisayollari Ctrl + S 'e basin.

Uygulamayi kapat

Page 21: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-16

Sekil 2-3-11 Menu bardan secim

Sekil 2-3-12 Toolbardan secimi

Farkli Kaydet:

: Varolan uygulamayi baska bir isimde saklamak için File > Save As 'e basin(Sekil 2-3-13). Ekrana sekil 2-3-14 'deki gibi; yeni uygulama-nin ismini yazmak için bir kutucuk gelecektir.

Save

Save application

Page 22: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-17

Sekil 2-3-13 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-3-14 Uygulama ismi girme kutucuguExport

: Resim formatindaki datalari (bmp dosyalarini) export

etmek için basin (Sekil 2-3-16), veya File > Export seçin (sekil 2 -3 -15) ,

klavye kisayolu Ctrl+E yollarini kullanin.

Save as other application

Page 23: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-18

Sekil 2-3-15 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-3-16 Toolbardan secimi

Export

Export

Page 24: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-19

Sekil 2 -3 -17 Dosyayi export ettikten sonra

Ekrani ve Receteyi Upload etme:

: File > Upload sectikten sonra (Sekil 2-3 -18),sifreyi gir-mek zorundasiniz. (Sifre HMI 'da en yuksek oncelige sahiptir) Gelen dialog kutucu- na (Sekil 2-3-14). uygulamanin ismini yazdiktan sonra sekil 2-3-19 'daki dialog kutucugu

belirir ve Upload islemi baslar. Upload islemini tkip edebilir veya stop tusuna basarak dur-durabilirsiniz. Uplad ettiginiz dosya otomatik olarak HMI formatina donecektir ve orjinali

bozulamdan acilabilecektir.

Page 25: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-20

Sekil 2 -3-18 Menu bardan Ekrani ve Receteyi Upload etme

Sekil 2-3-19 Ekran ve recete Upload goruntusu

Upload screen and recipe

Page 26: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-21

Upload reçete

: Bu secenek Upload ile ayni isleve sahiptir fakat yal-nýzca reçeteyi upload eder. Receteyi cekmek için sifreye ihtiyac vardir.

Sekil 2 -3-20 Upload reçete

Download firmware

: HMI ' 'yi upgrade etmeye veya islev eklemeye yarar.

Upload recipe

Page 27: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-22

Fig. 2-3-21 Download firmware

Sifre korumasi:

: File>Password Protect ile bu fonksiyonu aktif veyapasif edebilirsiniz.(Sekil 2 -3 -22).

Eger aktif ise sekli belirecektir.Dop dosyasini acmadan önce sifre soracaktir.sifre Option > Model parameter 'den ayarlanabilir. (Sekil 2-3 -25). Eger sifreyi pasif ederseniz sekil 2-3 -24 'deki kutucuk belirir.

Download firmware

Page 28: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-23

Sekil 2 -3 -22 Sifre korumasi

Sekil 2-3-23 Sekil 2 -3 -24

Password Protect

Page 29: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-24

Sekil 2 -3-25 Sifre ayarlari

Yazdir:

: Ekrandaki sayfayi print etmek için

butonuna basabiliriz. Yada File > Print (Sekil 2 -3 -26), veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl+P 'yi

kullanabiliriz.

Page 30: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-25

Sekil 2-3-26 Menu bardan Print etme

Fig. 2 -3 -27 Toolbardan print islemi

Print

Print

Page 31: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-26

Baski onizleme:

: Print almadan önce önizleme yapabiliriz.

Sekil 2 -3 -28 Baski önizleme

Print Preview

Page 32: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-27

Sekil 2 -3-29 önizleme

Son dosya kisayolu: Last file path:En son acilan 4 dosyayi burdan kisayol olarak acabiliriz.

Sekil 2 -3 -30.

Page 33: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-28

Sekil 2 -3 -30 Son açilan dosyalar

Cikis:

: Screen editor programindan cikmamizi saglar File > Exit (sekil 2 -3 -31). Eger uygulmanizi saklamadiysaniz ekrana saklamanizgerek-tigini hatirlatan sekil 2-3-10 dialog kutucugu belirir.

Last open file path

Page 34: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-29

Sekil 2 -3 -31 Cikis

2-3-2 EDIT

Sekil 2 -4 -1 Edition secenekleri

1. Geri

Exit

Page 35: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-30

: Son yapilani geri almak icin kullanilir.

Butonuna basarak,v veya File > Undo secerek Sekil 2-4-2 , veya klavye kisayoluCtrl + Z. basarak gerceklestirilebilir.

Sekil 2-4-2 Menu bardan secimi

Undo

Page 36: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-31

Sekil 2-4 -3 Toolbardan secimi

2. Ileri

: Geri alinan islemi eski haline almak icin kullanilir.

Sekil2-4 -5 , veya File > Redo secerek Sekil 2-4-4 , veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl+Y ile

gerceklenir.

Undo

Page 37: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-32

Sekil 2-4-4 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-4 -5 Toolbardan secimi

Redo

Redo

Page 38: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-33

3. Kes

: Secilen nesneyi silmeye yarar , yapistirma ve tasima

islemleri icin clipboardda saklar . butonu sekil 2-4-7, veya File > Cut

sekil 2-4 -6 , veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl + X ile kullanilabilir.

Sekil 2-4-6 Menubardan secimi

Cut

Page 39: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-34

Sekil 2-4 -7 Toolbardan secimi

4. Kopyala

: Secilen nesneyi clipboarda kopyalar. Copy butonuna basa-

rak sekil 2-4-7, veya File > Copy secerek sekil 2-4-8, veya klavye kisayolu

Ctrl + C kullanilabilir.

Cut

Page 40: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 41: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-36

5. Yapistir

: Clipboardaki nesneyi yapistirmaya yarar. butonu

Sekil 2-4 -11 , veya File > Paste sekil 2-4 -10, veya klavye kisayolu Ctrl + V ile

kullanilabilir.

Sekil 2-4-10 Menu bardan secimi

Paste

Page 42: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-37

Sekil 2 -4 -11 Toolbardan secimi

6. Sil

:Secilen nesneyisilmek icin kullanilir sekil 2 -4 -12.

Paste

Page 43: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-38

Sekil 2-4-12 Delete

7. Tumunu sec

: Butun nesneleri secmeye yarar ,sekil 2 - 4 -13. Butun hepsini sectigimizde, ust sol kosedeki nesne ana element olarak mavi ve beyaz cerceve ile cevrelenecektir.Digerleri ise siyah beyaz cerceve ile cevrelenir.

Delete

Page 44: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-39

Sekil 2-4-13 Menu bardan secme

8.Bul

: Aradiginiz bir nesneyi ,resmi, adresi sayfayi bulmaniza ya-rar .Klavye kisayolu Ctrl+F veya Edit>find 'den ulasilabilir.Aranan nesne bulun- dugu zaman output windowda gorebilirsiniz.

Select All

Page 45: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-40

Sekil 2-4-14 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-4-15 Dialog kutucugundan bulma

Find

Page 46: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-41

Sekil 2-4 -16 Aranan element secimi

9. Yenile

: Okunan adresi,yazilan adresi.text 'i o sayfada veya butun sayfalarda degistirmeye yarar.Adres tipi bit,word,dword olabilir,sekil 2-4 -17.

Aranan element

isaretlenir.

Aranan element

Page 47: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-42

Sekil 2-4-17 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2 -4 -18 Yenileme ornegi

1@D1000 'i bul

Replace

1@D2000 'le yenile

Page 48: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-43

10. Grupla

: Edit > Group secerek yada butonuna tiklayarak se-

cilen butun nesneleri grup yapma imkani saglar .Nesneleri grup yaptiktan sonra ele-

mentler tek bir nesne gibi davranir grup olarak hareket eder.

Sekil 2-4-19 Menu bardan secimi

Page 49: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-44

Sekil 2 -4-20 Grup yapma

Grup Boz:

: Nesnelerden olusan grubu bozmak icin Edit > Ungroup seceriz

butonuna basarakta nesneleri ungrup edebiliriz.

Selected symbol

Page 50: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-45

Sekil 2-4-21 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2 -4 -22 Ungrup

Selected symbol

Page 51: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-46

Kati Ayarla

: Nesnelerin diger nesnelere gore katlarini (altta,ustte)ayarla-mamizi saglar.Edit>Layer yada butonlariyla secilebilir.

Sekil 2-4-23 Menu bardan secimi

Page 52: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-47

Fig. 2-4-24 Layer arrangement

Hizalamak

: Secilen elementleri hizalamaya yarar. Edit > Align ,sekil

2-4 -25 veya butonlariyla ,sekil 2 - 4 -26.Bu islevi gerceklestir-

mek icin 2 elementten daha fazlasina ihtiyaciniz vardir .

Bring to front

Send to back

Bring forward

Send backward

Page 53: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-48

Sekil 2-4-25 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-4-26 Hizalama sonucu

Page 54: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-49

Ayni olculerde yap

: Edit >Make Same Size yaparak yada sekil 2-4-28 deki butonu tiklayarak secili elementleri ayni olculerde yapabilirsiniz.

Sekil 2-4 -27 Ayni olculerde yapma

Page 55: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-50

Fig. 2-4-28 Result of make same size

Yazi Yazma

: Text duzenlemek icin kullanilir.Bu islevi sectigimizde basi- na isareti gelir. Ayrica toolbardan da secilerek kullanilabilir.

Make the

same height

Make the

same size

Make the

same width The base

Page 56: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-51

Sekil 2 -4 -29 Yazi yazma

Cogaltmak

: Bir elementi ayni anda birden fazla kopyalamamizi saglar. X ve Y ekseninde kacar adet yapmak istedigimizi yazarak ayisini belirlemis oluruz. Minimum kopya sayisi 2 olabilir. Eger yalnizca satira yada kolana kopyalamak istiyor-

sak ilgili yerlere check isareti koyariz.Element numaralari yataydan baslayarak dikeye dogru artar.Adresler bit yada word olabilir. bkz. sekil 2-4 -31 ve sekil 2 - 4 -32

Ozellik basliklari

Text toolbar

Page 57: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-52

Sekil 2 -3 -30 Cogaltma

Sekil 2 - 4 -31 Cogaltma ornegi

Page 58: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-53

Sekil 2 -4 -32 Coklu kopyalama ornegi

2-3-3 View

Sekil 2-5-1 View menusu secenekleri

Calisma esnasinda hangi toolbarlarin gozukup gozukmeyecegini ayarliyabildigimiz bo-

lumdur.Eger birisini secersek basina isareti gelecek ve sectiginiz toolbar pence-resi ekranin ust kosesinde yerini alacaktir.

Docking pencereler

Page 59: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-54

Sekil 2-5 -2

1. Standard toolbar

simge Fonksiyon Tanim

New Yeni uygulama acar

Open Varolan uygulamayi acar

Save Uygulamayi saklar

Export Uygulamayi Bmp formatinda export eder

Undo Bir adim geri alir (bazilari geri alinamaz)

Redo Bir adim ileri alir

Cut Secili elementleri keser

Copy Secili elementleri kopyalar

Paste Secili elementleri yapistirir

Find Adres yada yazilari bulur.

New screen Yeni sayfa acar

Open screen Eski sayfayi acar

Print preview Baski onizlemesi

Print printeder

About screen editor

Screen editor versiyonu hakkinda bilgi verir

Tablo 2 -5 -1 Standart toolbar menusu

Page 60: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-55

2. Durum arac cubugu Anlik bilgileri gosterir

Fig. 2-5-3 Durum arac cubugu

3. Text arac cubugu

Simge Fonksiyon Tanim

Text size Yazinin boyunu ayarlar

Font Fontu ayarlar

Align left Sola hizalar

Center to page horizontally

Yaziyi tam ortaya alir

Align right Saga hizalar

Align top Ustte hizalar

Center to page vertically

Yaziyi sayfanin dikey olarak tam ortasina alir

Align bottom

Asagi hizalar

Text color Yazi rengini ayarlar

Underline Yazinin altini cizer

Table 2 -5 -2 Text arac cubugu

4. Bitmap arac cubugu

Simge Fonksiyon Tanim

Enlarge a Figure Secilen sekli nesne kadar buyutur

Actual Figure size Secilen sekli gercek boyutuna getirir

Al ign to left side Secilen sekli sola hizalar

Center to page horizontally

Secilen sekli ortalar

Align to right side Secilen sekli sola hizalar

Align to top side Secilen sekli uste hizalar

Yukleme methoduMouse kordinatlari

Caps Lock

Scroll Lock Num Lock

Software

versiyonu

Page 61: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-56

Simge Fonksiyon Tanim

Center to page vertically

Sekli sayfanin dikey olarak tam ortasina al

Align to bottom side Sekli sayfanin alt kosesine hizalar

Table 2-5-4 Bitmap arac cubugu5. Element arac cubuguToolbar

Simge Fonksiyon Tanim

Buton

Ibre

Bar

Pay

Gosterge

Deger

Display

Grafik

display

Giris

Page 62: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-57

Toolbar

Simge Fonksiyon Tanim

Egri

Ornekleme

Alarm

Sekil

Table 2-5-5 Elementler

6. Planlama arac cubugu

A. Ust sira planlama arac cubugu

Simge Fonksiyon Tanim

Current text Secili nesnenin uzerindeki text

Current status O anki durumu

Previous windows Bir onceki pencereye doner

Next windows Bir sonraki pencereye gider

Compile Calismayi compile eder

Download screen data and recipe

Calismayi ve receteyi download eder

Download screen data

Ekrani download eder

On-line simulation Calismayi test etmek icin kullanilir PLC

baglantisina gerek vardir

Off-line simulation Calismayi test etmek icin kullanilir PLC

baglantisina gerek yoktur

Tablo 2-5-6

b. Alt sira planlama arac cubugu

Page 63: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-58

Simge Fonksiyon Tanim

Group Secilen nesneleri gruplar

Ung roup Grubu bozar

Bring to front Secilen nesneyi uste alir

Send to back Secilen nesneyi alta alir

Bring forward Secilen nesneyi one alir

Send backward Secilen nesneyi arkaya alir

Align left Secilennesneleri sola hizalar

Align right Secilen nesneleri sola hizalar

Align top Secilen nesneleri yukari hizalar

Align bottom Secilen nesneleri asagi hizalar

Center to page vertically

Nesneyi sayfanin dikey ortasina yerlestirir

Center to page horizontally

Nesneyi sayfanin yatay ortasina yerlestirir

Make same width Secili nesneleri ayni genislikte yapar

Make same height Secili nesneleri ayni yukseklikte yapar

Make same size Secili nesneleri ayni olculerde yapar

Tablo 2-5-7 Alt seviye planlama arac cubugu

C. Zoom arac cubugu

Simge Fonksiyon Tanim

Zoom level

Zoom seviyesini ayarlar, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 150%, 200% ve 300%

Zoom in Zoom seviyesini arttirir,150%, 200%

ve 300%.

Zoom out Zoom seviyesini azaltir, 25%, 50% ve

75%.

1:1 Elementleri gercek boyutunda gosterir

Tablo 2-5-8 Zoom arac cubugu 7. Property tablosu

Detayli bilgi icin bolum 3-1 'e bakiniz.

Page 64: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-59

Sekil 2 -5-4 Element property tablosu

8. Output PenceresiYapilanlari kaydeder ve hatali adresleri gosterir.

Sekil 2 -5 -6 Output penceresi

Sekil 2 -5 -7 Output penceresi

Page 65: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-60

Sekil 2-5-8 Output ornegi Sekil 2-5-9 Hata ornegi

9. Yakinlastir

: Nesnenin gorunusunu 150% , 200% ve 300% oranla-

rinda buyutur.Detaylar icin sekil 2-5 -10, sekil 2-5-11, sekil2-5-12 ve sekil 2-5 -13

Sekil 2-5-1 0 Menu bardan secimi

Zoom in

Page 66: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-61

Sekil 2 -5 -11 Toolbardan secimi

Sekil 2-5-12 Zoom seviyesi = 100%

100%

Zoom in

Page 67: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-62

Sekil 2-5-13 Zoom seviyesi= 150%

10. Uzaklastir

: Nesnenin gorunusunu 25%,50% and 75% oranlarinda

kucultur . Detaylar icin sekil 2 -5 -14, sekil 2-5 -1 5 ve sekil 2 -5 -1 6.

150%

Page 68: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-63

Sekil 2-5-1 4 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-5-1 5 Zoom out 'dan once

Zoom out

Page 69: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-64

Sekil 2 -5 -16 Zoom out 'dan sonra

11. Gercek boyut

: Gorunusu gercek olculerine alir. ve butunlariyla .

zoom out veya zoom in yapabiliriz yada sekil 2-5-17 'deki gibi secim yapabiliriz.

Sekil 2 -5 -1 7

12. Tam ekran

: Bkz. sekil 2-5-18 ve sekil 2-5-1 9.

75%

Page 70: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-65

Sekil 2 -5 -1 8 Tamekran yapmadan once

Sekil 2-5-19 Tam ekran (Esc veya mousenin sol tusuyla burdan cikabilirsiniz)

Page 71: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-66

I/O ekrani

: Bkz. sekil 2-5-2 0 ve sekil 2-5-2 1.

Sekil 2 -5 -20 I/O ekranindan once

Page 72: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-67

Sekil 2 -5-21 I/O ekrani (Esc veya mousenin sol tusuyla burdan cikabilirsiniz)

Grid ayarlari

: Elementleri kolayca hizalama imkani verir. Grid araligi sekil 2-5-22 'deki menuden ayarlanir.

Sekil 2-5 -2 2 Grid ayarlari kutucugu

Page 73: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-68

Sekil 2-5-23 Gridlerin gorunusu

2-3-4 Nesneler (Elements)

Sekil 2-6-1 Nesne secenekleri

Screen editor bir cok ozelligi bulunan 11 tip nesneye sahiptir.Bunlar;buton,ibre,bar, pay, gosterge, deger gosterme, grafik display,deger girme,egri ornekleme,alarm,grafik

vb. Kullanmak istediginiz elementi menu bardan alip kullanabilirsiniz,sekil 2-6-2 ve sekil 2-6 -3.

Page 74: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-69

Sekil 2 -6 -2 secilen elementin olcusunu ayarlama

Sekil 2-6-3 Elementin gorunusu

Element olusturmanin farkli bir yontemi:Sayfanin uzerindeyken mausenin sag butonuna tiklayarak . Mousenin isaretcisini calisma

bolgesinin ustune getirir sag butona tiklariz acilan element tablosundan kullanmak is- tedigimiz elementi secip sol butona tiklariz,sectigimiz elementi sayfanin istedigimiz bol-

gesine koyar ve surukleyerek buyutlarini ayarliyabiliriz.Ozellikler sayfasindan (properties window) diger ozelliklerini ayarlayabiliriz,sekil 2 -6 -4, sekil 2-6-6 ve sekil 2 -6 -7.(Bkz.bolum 3)

Page 75: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-70

Sekil 2-6-4 Acilan menuden elementin secimi

Sekil 2-6-5 Menu bardan elementin secimi

Click right button Click left button

to select

Page 76: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-71

Sekil 2-6-6

Sol butona basin ve birak-

madan surukleyin

Boyutlar tamam ise

butonu birakin

Page 77: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-72

Sekil 2-6-7 Element tasima

Mouse fonksiyonlari windows® ile aynidir. Mouse isaretcisi seklini aldigi za- man sol butona basili tutarak nesneyi surukleyip tasiyabiliriz ,sekil 2-6-8, sekil 2-6 -9

ve sekil 2-6-10.

Sekil 2-6-8 Isaretci seklini alacak

Page 78: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-73

Fig. 2-6-9

Sol butona basin ve

birakmadan surukleyin

Page 79: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-74

Sekil 2 -6 -10 Element genisligini ayarlama:

Secilen nesnenin uzatmak istedigimiz kosesine gidilip isaretcinin olmasi beklenir vesol tusa basili tutup surukleyerek genislik ayarlanir ,sekil 2-6-12 ve sekil 2-6-13 .

Tasimayi bitirmek i-

cin butonu birakin

Page 80: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-75

Sekil 2 -6 -11

Sekil 2 -6 -12

isaretci

Sol tusa basin ve

surukleyin

Page 81: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-76

Sekil 2-6-13 Nesnenin yeni olculeri

Elementin yuksekligini ayarlama: Secilen nesnenin uzatmak istedigimiz kosesine gidilip isaretcinin olmasi beklenir ve

sol tusa basip surukleyerek yukseklik ayarlanir ,sekil 2 -6 -14, sekil 2-6 -15 ve sekil 2 -6 -1 6.

Page 82: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-77

Sekil 2 -6 -14

Isaretci

Page 83: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-78

Sekil 2 -6 -15

Sol tusa basin ve

surukleyin

Page 84: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-79

Sekil 2 -6 -16 Yukseklik ve genisligi birlikte ayarlama (Y ontem 1)

Isaretci seklini aldiginda sol tusa basili tutup surukleyerek nesnenin genislik ve yuksekligini birlikte ayarlayabilirsiniz, sekil 2-6-17, sekil 2-6-18 ve sekil 2-6-19.

Birak ve bitir

Page 85: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-80

Sekil 2 -6 -17

isaretci

Page 86: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-81

Sekil 2 -6 -18

Sol tusa basin ve birak-

madan surukleyin

Page 87: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-82

Sekil 2 -6 -19 Yukseklik ve genisligi birlikte ayarlama (Yontem 2)

Isaretci seklini aldiginda sol tusa basili tutup surukleyerek nesnenin genislikve yuksekligini birlikte ayarlayabilirsiniz, sekil 2-6-20, sekil 2-6-21 ve sekil 2-6-22.

Birak ve bitir

Page 88: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-83

Sekil 2 -6 -20

Sekil 2 -6 -21

isaretci

sol butona basin ve birak-

madan surukleyin

Page 89: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-84

Fig. 2-6-22

Karakter girme:

Karakter girme islemi windows® ' da oldugu gibi isaretci seklini aldigi zaman

yapilabilir ,sekil 2-6-23 ve sekil 2-6-24

Birak ve bitir

Page 90: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-85

Sekil 2 -6 -23

Sekil 2 -6 -24

Sol butona tikladigimizda

isaratci seklini alir

Karakter girisi

Blink

Ayni zamanda buraya-

da yazilir.

Page 91: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-86

Mouse 'in sag butonu:Farkli bolgelerde mause'nin sag butonuna basildiginda farkli menulerin acildigini farke-

deceksiniz ,sekil 2 -6 -25, sekil 2 -6 -26 sekil 2 -6 -27.

Sekil 2 -6 -25

Toolbar display

Page 92: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-87

Sekil 2 -6 -26

Sekil 2 -6 -27

Element secimi

Element basimi

Page 93: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-88

2-3-5 Sayfa

Sekil 2 -7-1 Sayfa secenekleri Eger sayfayi kapama butonuna basarsaniz(sekil 2-7-2)sayfa silinmeden gizlenecektir.

Genel olarak programlardakapama butonuna bastigimizda cikmadan saklama uyarisi gelir . Fakat screen editorde sayfayi kapatmaz sadece gizler.

Sekil 2-7-2

1. Yeni sayfa acma:

Yeni sayfa acmak icin butonuna basabili riz yada Screen > New screen secebilir

(sekil 2-7-3), veya klavye kisayolu Shift+N kulluanabiliriz,daha sonra karsimiza sekil 2-7-5deki dialog kutucugu geecektir.

Sayfayi gizlemek icin

butonuna basilir

Page 94: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-89

Sekil 2-7-3 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-7 -4 Toolbardan secimi

New screen

Yeni sayfa

Page 95: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-90

Sekil 2-7-5 Yeni ekran acma dialog kutucugu

2. Ekran acma

eni sayfa acmak icin butonuna basabiliriz yada Screen > Open screen secebiliriz.

(sekil 2 -7 -6) veya klavye kisayolu Shift+N kulluanabiliriz,daha sonra karsimiza sekil 2-7-8 dialog

kutucugu gelecektir.

Sekil 2-7-6 Menu bardan secimi

Sayfa ismini girin

Open screen

Page 96: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-91

Sekil 2-7 -7 Toolbardan secimi

Sekil 2 -7 -8 Sayfa acma dialog kutucugu

Open screen

Page 97: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-92

3. Sayfa kesme Sayfanin tumunu kesmek icin kullanilir. Screen > cut screen secerek (sekil 2-7-9) veya klavye kisayolu Shift + T kullanarak sayfayi kesebiliriz. (Not:Sayfa kesme islemini ge- ri alamazsiniz bu islem sayfa silme islemiyle ayni islevi yapar fakat Paste komutu

ile geri yapistirilabilir.)

Sekil 2-7-9 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-7 -10 Sayfa kesme uyari mesaji

4. Sayfa kopyalamaScreen > copy (sekil 2-7-11)secerek yada Shift + C basarak bir sayfanin tumunu

kopyalayabiliriz.

Cut screen

Page 98: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-93

Sekil 2 -7 -11

5. Sayfa yapistirma

Screen > paste secerek (sekil 2-7-12) , yada Shift + P yaparak sayfayi yapis-tirabiliriz. Yapistirilan sayfanin butun ozellikleri ayni olacaktir yalnizca sayfa ismi otoma-

tik olarak verilecektir.

Copy screen

Page 99: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-94

Fig. 2-7-12

6. Sayfa silme

Screen > delete secerek (sekil 2 -7-13) yada Shift + D 'ye basarak sayfayi sile-biliriz. (Not: Sayfa silindikten sonra geri alinamaz bu yuzden silmeden once dik-

katli olmakta fayda vardir.)

Paste screen

Page 100: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-95

Sekil 2 -7 -13

Sekil 2-7 -14 Sayfa silme uyarisi

7. Sayfa Acilis Macrosu

Sayfa acildiginda gerceklesen macrolardir (detayli bilgi icin bolum 4 'e bakiniz)

Delete screen

Page 101: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-96

Sekil 2 -7 -15

Sekil 2-7-16 Ozellikler sayfasindan secimi

Screen Open Macro

Screen open Macro

Page 102: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-97

Sekil 2 -7 -17 Makro yazimi

8. Sayfa Kapanis Macrosu Sayfa kapandiginda gerceklesen macrolardir (detayli bilgi icin bolum 4 'e bakiniz)

Page 103: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-98

Sekil 2-7-18 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-7-19 Ayarlar sayfasindan secimi

Screen Close Macro

Screen Close Macro

Page 104: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-99

Sekil 2 -7 -20 Makrolar

9. Sayfa dongu macrosu

Sayfa acik oldugu surece peryodik olarak gerceklesen macrolardir.(Macronun ger- ceklesme peryodlarini dongu zaman ayarlari menusunden ayarlayabiliriz.(Bkz.bolum 4)

Page 105: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-100

Sekil 2-7-21 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-7-22 Ozellikler sayfasindan secimi

Screen Cycle Macro

Screen Cycle Macro

Page 106: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-101

Sekil 2 -7 -23 Macro basimi

10. Yardimci butonlarYardimci anahtarlar her sayfada ayri ayri kullanilabilir, sekil 2 -7 -24, sekil 2-7-25 sekil 2-7 -26.

Page 107: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-102

Sekil 2-7-24 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-7-25 Yardimci butonlar

Yardimci butonlar

Auxiliary key

Page 108: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-103

Sekil 2-7-26 Yardimci butonlarin secimiModellere gore kullanilabillecek yardimci buton sayilari:

DOP Model ismi Yardimci buton sayisi

DOP-A57GSTD 4

DOP-A57CSTD 4

DOP-A75CSTD 5

DOP-A10TCTD 6

11. Ekran ayarlari Bu ayarlarda , mevcut ekranin alt sayfa olup olmayacagi ayalanir. Ayrica alt sayfanin

olculerinin ve saat macrosunun zamanlarinin ayarlandigi yerdir,sekil 2-7 -29.

Page 109: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-104

Sekil 2-7-27 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-7-28 Ayarlar penceresinden secimi

Screen properties

Page 110: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-105

Sekil 2 -7-29 Ekran ayarlari penceresi

2-3-6 Araclar (Tools)

Sekil 2-8 -1 Araclar secenekleri

1. Derleyici (Compile) Yapilan uygulamayi HMI formatinda delemeye yarar. Eger uygulama yeni ise compile

etmeden once saklamaniz gerektigini hatirlatir. Eger mevcut uygulama saklanmis veya eski bir uygulama ise direk olarak derler.Derleme yaparken output penceresinde nes-

neler ve varsa hatalara ait mesajlar gozukur.Eger bir hata varsa derleme islemi tamam-

lanmaz.Tools > compile secerek veya butonuna basarak yada klavyede

Ctrl + F7 tuslarina basarak calismamizi compile edebiliriz, sekil 2-8-4 ve sekil 2-8-5

Alt ekran ayarlari

Macro icin

gecikme zamani

Secilerek ilisikteki ayarlar yapilabilir

Page 111: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-106

Sekil 2-8-2 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-8 -3 Toolbardan secimi

Compile

Compile

Page 112: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-107

Sekil 2-8-4 Compile ornegi

Sekil 2-8-5

Kac hata oldugunu

gosterir

Butun derleme sonuclari bu-

rada gozukur. Eger bir hata varsa

sebebi yazar ve hata mesajinin us-

tune tiklarsak hatali nesne belirir.

Compile basarili

Page 113: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-108

2. Uygulamayi ve receteyi download etme (Download screen&Recipe) Ekrani ve receteyi download etmek icin Tools > Download secilir sekil 2-8-7 veya

butonuna basilmalidir sekil 2-8-8 klavyede Ctrl+F8 tuslarina basilaraklta bu

islem gerceklestirilebilir.Eger bilgisayar HMI 'a baglanamiyorsa hata mesaji verir, sekil 2-8-10 ve sekil 2-8-11.

Sekil 2-8-7 Menu bardan secimi

Download Screen & Recipe

Page 114: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-109

Sekil 2-8 -8 Toolbardan secimi

Sekil 2-8-9 Download ediyor

Download Screen

& Recipe

Page 115: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-110

Sekil 2-8-10 USB baglanti hatasi Sekil 2-8-11 Data formati Hatali

3. Uygulamayi download etme (Download Screen) Yalnizca uygulamayi download etmek icin kullanilir.Tools >Download screen secerek (se-

kil 2-8-12) veya butonuna basarak (sekil 2-8-13) yada klavyede Ctrl+F9

tuslarina basarak yapilabilir.

Sekil 2-8-1 2 Menu bardan secimi

Download Screen

Page 116: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-111

Sekil 2 -8 -1 3 Toolbardan secimi

4. Online simulasyon (Online simulation)Yapilan calismayi online olarak simule etmek icin kullanilir ama bu arada DOP bir

PLC 'ye bagli olmalidir. Aksi takdirde online simulasyon yapilamaz.Fakat offline simu-lasyon yapmak icin PLC baglantisina gerek yoktur.Tools > Online simulation secerek

(sekil 2-8-14) yada butonuna basarak (sekil 2-8-15) yada Ctrl + F4 tuslarina basarak

basarak online simulasyon yapilabilir.(sekil 2-8-16)

Download screen

Page 117: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-112

Sekil 2-8-1 4 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2 -8 -1 5 Toolbardan secimi

Online simulation

Online simulation

Page 118: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-113

Sekil 2-8-16 Online simulasyon display

5. Offline simulasyon (Offline simulation) Offline simulasyon calismanin dogrulugunu,okunan ve yazilan adreslerin ve macro-

larin testi icin kullanilabilir, PLC baglantisi gerekmez.Tools > Offline simulation secerek

(sekil 2-8-17), butonuna basarak(sekil 2-8-18) yada klavye kisayolu Ctrl + F5 'e basarak gerceklestirilebilir.Offline simulasyon goruntusu sekil 2-8 -1 6 'daki gibi olacaktir.

Sekil 2-8-1 7 Menu bardan secimi

Offline Simulation

Page 119: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-114

Sekil 2 -8 -1 8 Toolbardan secimi

6. Recete (Recipe)

Recete kontrolore istenen degerleri pratik bir sekilde girme imkani kilar. HMI 'in hafizasini kullanarak daha onceden kaydedilmis datalari PLC 'ye transfer edebilirsiniz.Recete

uygulamadan ayri olarak recete hazirlik bolumunde duzenlenir ve ayri olarak download edilebilir.Ayrica bir recete her tur PLC icin kullanilabilir.Receteyi kullanabil-

mek icin once aktif etmek gerekir,sekil 2 -8 -20.

Offline simulation

Page 120: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-115

Sekil 2-8-1 9 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-8-20 Recete hazirlama kutucugu

Recipe

Page 121: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-116

Sekil 2-8 -20 'de 10 grup var ve her grup 10 word 'den olusuyor.Bu 10 gruptan herhangi istedigimiz bir tanesini HMI hafizasindan PLC 'ye transfer edebiliriz.

7. Receteyi download etme (Download Recipe)

Receteyi HMI 'a yukler. Tools > Download recipe secilerek yapilabilir.Ayrica hazirladigi-miz bir receteyi PC 'mizde .rcp uzantili bir dosya olarak saklayabiliriz.

Sekil 2-8-2 1 Recete acma

8. Recete hazirlama(Recipe edition) Recete fonksiyonunu kullanmak icin aktif etmek gerekir.( )Eger bu fonksiyonu aktif etmezsek receteyi download etsek bile kullanamayiz.

Adres: Recetenin basliyacagi adresi girdigimiz bolgedir. ,

(Sekil 2-8-22 ) (Not: Buraya girdigimiz adres PLC 'nin data bolgesi olmalidir)

Page 122: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-117

Sekil 2 -8-22 Recetenin baslangic adresi

Uzunluk (Lenght):Recetenin herbir grubunun kac word 'den olusacaginin belirlendigi bolumdur.

Sifirdan buyuk bir sayi yazilmalidir aksi takdirde sekil 2-8-23 'deki uyari gelir.

Sekil 2 -8 -23

Grup (Group): Recetenin kac gruptan olacagini belirler. Grup sayisi sifirdan buyuk girilmelidir

aksi takdirde sekil 2-5-24 'deki uyari mesaj kutucugu gelecektir.

Page 123: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-118

Sekil 2 -8 -24

Uygula (Apply):Grup numarasi ve uzunlugunu girdikten sonra Apply butonu tiklanarak recete acilabilir.HMI 'in recete hafizasi 64K 'dir (uzunluk X grup=64 X 1024 'den

kucuk olmalidir.) Eger bunlardan birisi 0 veya limitin ustunde olursa sekil 2-8-25 'deki uyari mesaj kutucugu gelecektir.

Sekil 2 -8 -25

Ac (Open): “Open” butonuna basilir,acilmak istenilen recete ismine tiklanir.Acilan recete dosyasi diger marka PLC'lerde de kullanilabilecegi icin start adres kismi bostur.

Sekil 2 -8 -26

Saklama (Save): Recete dosyasini PC 'ye saklarken ayni recete degisik marka PLC lerde kullanilabilecegi icin start adres otomatik olarak saklanmaz.

Page 124: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-119

Sekil 2 -8 -27

Reset: Hazirlanan receteyi siler.Sekil 2 -8 -28 ve Sekil 2 -8 -29

Sekil 2-8-28 Recete ekrani

Page 125: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-120

Sekil 2 -8 -29 Resetten sonraTemizle (Clear):Clar butonuna bastigimizda girmis oldugumuz butun degerler

0 olur,sekil 2-8-30 ve sekil 2-8-31.

Sekil 2-8-30 Recete ekrani

Page 126: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-121

Sekil 2 -8 -31 Clear yaptiktan sonra

Print: Recete degerlerinin ciktisini alir.

OK: Yazilan receteyi onaylamak icin kullanilir. (Onaylayabilmek icin adres girilmis olmalidir,sekil 2-8 -32)

Sekil. 2 -8-32 Adres girilmemisse gelen hata mesaji

Page 127: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-122

Iptal (Cancel): Cancel butonunu kullanarak receteyi iptal edebiliriz.(Yazilan bilgileri saklama-)dan cikar.)

2-3-7 Secenekler (Options)

Sekil 2 -9 -1 Secenekler menusu

1. Model parametreleri (Model Parameter) Options > Model parameter secilerek HMI 'in genel haberlesme ayarlarinin yapildigi

model parametreleri ayar menusunu acilabilir.Genel ayarlar kisminda genel olarak uy-gulamanin ismi,HMI tipi, PLC tipi, baslangic sayfasi secimi,sistem kontrol ve durum bol-

gesi, download portu, sifre vb. ayarlari yapilabilir.Haberlesme ayarlari kisminda PLC ID numarasi ve protokol ayarlari yapilabilir.Detaylar icin sekilleri inceleyiniz.

Fig. 2-9-2

Model Parameter

Page 128: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-123

Genel ayarlar (General setting)

Sekil 2-9-3

Uygulamanin ismi: Ayni zamanda dosyanin ismidir.

HMI type: HMI tipinin secildigi yerdir.DOP serisi farkli HMI 'lar icin farkli fonksiyonlar icerir.

Sekil 2-9-4 HMI tipi

Kontrolor(Controller): PLC tipi secmek icin kullanilir.

Sekil 2-9-5 PLC ayarlari

En yuksek seviye sifresi: En yuksek oncelikli passwordu koymak icin kullanilir.Yazilim 8 seviye sifresine sahiptir.(Option>Model parameter>security)

Page 129: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-124

Varsayilan baslangic seviyesi: Baslangic seviyesini ayarlamak icin kullanilir, en yuksek

seviye 7 en dusuk seviye 0 dir.

Sistem kontrol bolgesi (System control area)– start adres : Sistem kontrol bolgesi adresini belirler.(PLC'den sayfa gecisi icin de kullanilir.)

Sistem kontrol bolgesi-Uzunluk (System control area– length):Kullanilan foksiyonlara

gore uzunluk farkli olacaktir.(Mesela recete kullanirken uzunluk 8 Word 'den kisa olur ). Ilgili HMI parametreleri icin bolum 4 'e bakiniz.

Sistem durum bolgesi (System status area) – start adres: Sistem durum bolgesinin ad-

resini girmek icin kullanilir ,bu bolgeye PLC adresi girilmelidir. Sistem durum bolgesi data blogu 6 ardisik word 'den olusur. Ilgili parametreler icin bolum 4 'e bakiniz.

Yukleme ayarlari (Download setting )– USB1.1: Yukleme yapmak icin USB1.1 'i kullanir.

Yukleme ayarlari (Download setting )– PC haberlesme portu: Yukleme yapmak PC portlarini kullanir.

Sekil 2 -9 -6 PC haberlesme portla

Baslangic gecikme zamani (Delay time for start-up): Baslangicta PLC'nin calismasini beklemesi icin HMI 'a gecikme zamani girilir.(Ayar araligi 0-255 saniyedir.)

Saat Makrosu Gecikme zamani (Delay time for clock macro): Saat makronun gercek-

lesmesi icin gecikme zamani olusturur.(Ayar araligi 100~999 ms. dir.) Haberlesme Parametreleri Ayarlari (Communication parameter setting)

Page 130: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-125

Sekil 2-9-7

Baglanti ayarlari (Connection setting): Baglanti ayarlari ve port secilir. (DOP serileriayni anda farkli iki PLC 'ye baglanabilir.)

Sekil 2-9-8

Haberlesme portu (Communication port): PLC baglanti portu (COM 1 veya COM 2) secilir.

Page 131: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-126

Sekil 2-9-9

PLC ayarlari (PLC setting)-Password: PLC sifresi koymak icin kullanilir.

Haberlesme gecikme zamani(delay time for communicating):Haberlesme gecikme

suresi ayarlanir.( 0 - 255 ms.)

Okuma optimizasyonu(Optimize): Optimizasyonu aktif eder.Bkz. sekil 2-9-7

PLC ID: PLC 'nin ID numarasinin yazildigi bolumdur.Varsayilan deger 1'dir.Ayar ara-ligi 0- 255 'dir.

Haberlesme arayuzu (Communication interface): RS232 , RS422 ve RS485 secilebilir.Varsayilan deger RS232 'dir.

Sekil 2 -9 -10

Data bit: Data biti secimi yapilir.

Sekil 2 -9 -11 Stop bit: Stop biti secimi yapilir.

Sekil 2 -9 -12 Communication baud rate:Baud rate secimi yapilir.

Sekil 2 -9 -13

Parity bit: Parity biti secilir.

Sekil 2 -9 -1 4

2.Alarm ayarlari(Alarm setup) Options > Alarm setup secilerek alarm ayarlari menusune girilebilir (sekil 2-9-15). Bu

ayarlar element ayarlariyla birlikte yapilmalidir.Eger belirtilen sart secilmis adrestegerceklesirse, HMI otomatik olarak yazilan mesaji gosterecektir.Alarm ayar menu-

Page 132: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-127

sunde, append, delete, modify, OK, cancel ve close secenekleri vardir(sekil 2-9 -1 6). Alarm ayarlarini “append”i secerek yapabiliriz. (Sekil 2 -9-17).

Sekil 2-9-15 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-9 -16 Alarm ayarlariEkle (Append): Alarm ekler.

Alarm setup

Page 133: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-128

Sekil 2 -9-17 Alarm ozellikleri

Mesaj: Alarm geldiginde goruntulenecek mesaj. Display rengi: Alarm mesajinin rengi.

Trigger Mode: Alarmin ne zaman goruntulenecegi;ilgili bitin On-Off durumu secilir. Alarm screen: Alarmin hangi ekranda goruntulenecegi secilir.

Delete: Secilen alarmi siler. Modify: Secilen alarmi degistirir.

Scan time (sec.): Tarama zamani ayarlanir. Kayit sayisi (Number of records in history buffer): Alt alta kac alarm yazilacagi secilir,

Eger yazilan sayidan fazla alarm gelirse ilk gelen alarm silinir son gelen alarm en alta kaydolur.Ornek olarak History buffer sayisi 100 yazilsin.101 'inci alarm geldiginde 1.alarm sili-

nir, ikinci alarm 1. olur,ucuncu alarm 2.olur...yuzuncu kayit 99.olur ve yeni kayit 100'uncuolarak kaydedilir.

Retentive: Enerji kesintisinde kayitlari SRAM 'e kaydetmek icin kullanilir.(SRAM sistem

pilinden beslenir) Non -volatile: Kayitlari enerji kesilsede kesilmesede SRAM 'e kaydeder.

3. History setup: Detaylar icin bkz. bolum 3.

Page 134: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-129

Sekil 2 -9 -18

Ekle (Append): Bir grafik datasi ekler.

Sekil. 2 -9 -19 Grafik ayarlari

History setup

Page 135: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-130

Sekil 2-9-20 Tetikleyici - Timer

Sekil 2 -9-21 Tetikleyici- PLC

Okunacak adres (Read address): Okunacak adres girilir. Uzunluk (Size): Ardisik kac adres okunacagi girilir.

Sekil 2 -9 -22 Uzunluk

Ornekleme peryodu (Sample cycle): Okuma isleminin ornekleme peryodunu belirler.Eger tetikleyici PLC secilirse bu ayar gecersiz olur.Ayar araligi 0 - 10000 'dir.

Ornek sayisi (Sample point):

Eger yazilan sayidan fazla alarm gelirse ilk gelen alarm silinir son gelen alarm en alta kaydolur.Ornek olarak History buffer sayisi 100 yazilsin.101 'inci alarm geldiginde 1.alarm sili-

Page 136: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-131

nir, ikinci alarm 1. olur,ucuncu alarm 2.olur...yuzuncu kayit 99.olur ve yeni kayit 100'uncuthird record will become to the forth record…and the 100th record will become to 99th

olarak kaydolur.

Tarih ve zaman kayit (Record date and time): Aktif yada pasif eder.

Auto stop: Kayit sayisi doldugunda dursun yada durmasin secimi yapilir.

Non -vola tile: Enerji kesintisinde kayitlari saklasin yada saklamasin secimi yapilir.

Tetikleme kaynagi (Trigger source): Timer veya PLC secimi yapilabilir.

OK: Sakla ve cik.

Cancel: Saklamadan cikar.

Delete: Bir grafik datasini siler.

Modify: Grafik datasini yeniler.

4. Etiket tablosu (Tag table)

Cok kullanilan yada gerekli olan adreslere etiket vermeye yarar. Ornek olarak,M1 bitine "start"etiketini verelim.Calismamiza bir buton koyalim buton ayarlari write adress bolgesinde

tag kisminda start etiketini secersek write adres otomatik olarak M1 olur.

Page 137: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-132

Sekil 2-9-2 3 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2 -9 -24 Etiket tablosu ayarlari

PLC Memory

Internal Memory

Tag Table

Page 138: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-133

6. Resim bankasi (Picture Bank) Calismaya programin kendi kutuphanesinde olmayan rasimler eklemek icin kullanilr.

Resim formatlari BMP ve JPG olabilir.

Sekil 2 -9 -2 5 Menu bardan secimi

Picture Bank

Page 139: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-134

Sekil 2 -9 -26 Resim bankasi

Resim eni X boyu X rengi

Page 140: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-135

Eklenecek resim

Bir resim bankasi secin

veya yeni olusturun.

Select picture

Page 141: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-136

Fig. 2-9-27

Yeni resim bankasi ac

Resim bankasi sil

Resim bankasini sakla

Resim ekle

Resim cikar

Resmi sil

Renkleri ters cevir

Resmi256gritonacevirir

Yatay olarak aynalar

Dikey olarak aynalar

Gercek boyutlarina getirir

Uzat-eg

7. Yazi bankasi (Text bank)

Yaygin olarak kullanilan yada gerekli olan yazilari saklamak icin kullanilir.

Page 142: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-137

Sekil 2-9-28 Menu bardan secimi

Text bank

Page 143: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-138

Sekil 2-9 -29 Text bankasi

Page 144: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-139

Import text

Nesne secilip sag tusa basilir

Text secildikten sonra

OK 'e basilir

Page 145: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-140

Sekil 2 -9 -30 Yazi ornegi

8.Alt-makro (Sub -macro)

Alt makrolarin yazildigi bolumdur,bu makrolar diger makrolar tarafindan da cagrilabilir. Detaylar icin bkz.bolum 4

Page 146: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-141

Sekil 2-9-31 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-9-32 Alt-makro

9. Baslangic Makrosu (Initial macro) HMI enerjilendiginde gerceklesecek olan baslangic makrolarinin yazildigi bolgedir. Detaylar

icin bkz. bolum 4.

Submacro

Page 147: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-142

Sekil 2-9-33 Menu bardan secimi

10. Arkaplan Makrosu (Background Macro) Arkaplan makrolarinin girildigi bolumdur. Detaylar icin bkz. bolum 4.

Initial Macro

Page 148: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-143

Sekil 2-9-3 4 Menu bardan secimi

11. Zaman Makrosu (Clock Macro) HMI enerjili oldugu surece Refer to

chapter 4 for detail.

Background Macro

Page 149: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-144

Sekil 2-9-35 Menu bardan secimi

12. Cevresel Ayarlar (Environment setting) Screen editorun gorunusunu ayarlar.

Clock Macro

Page 150: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-145

Sekil 2-9-36 Menu bardan secimi

Environment

Page 151: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-146

Sekil 2-9 -37 Cevresel ayarlarSistem Kaynagi (system path): Yurutum ve .DLL dosyalarinin saklandigi bolgedir.

Gerekmedikce degistirilmemesi tavsiye edilir.

Cikis kaynagi (Output path): Compile isleminden sonra olusacak dosyalarin saklan-digi yerdir. Online simulasyon, offline simulasyon, upload ,download islemlerindenolusan yurutum dosyalari bu bolgede saklanir.

Gerekmedikce degistirilmemesi tavsiye edilir.

Secenekler (Options):

Arac cubuklari/Pencereler (Toolbars/windows): Kullanilacak arac cubuklarini secmek icin kullanilir.

Dil (Language): Dil secimi yapilir,3 dil secenegi vardir. Geleneksel Cince,basitlestirilmis Cince,ve Ingilizce.

Yukleme-cekme ayarlari (Upload/download setting):USB veya port secimi yapilabilir.

Page 152: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-147

Otomatik sakla (Auto save): Dosyayi peryodik olarak otomatik saklar. Zaman birimi dakikadir.

Otomatik ac (Auto open):Program acildiginda son calismayi otomatik olarak acar.

2-3-8 Pencereler (Windows)

Sekil 2 -10-1 Pencere secenekleri1. Pencereyi kapat (Close window)

O anki pencereyi gizlemeye yarar ,pencereden cikmaz. Gizlenmis pencereyi acmakicin Screen > Open screen secilmelidir.

Sekil 2-10 -2 Menu bardan secimi

Close window

Page 153: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-148

Sekil 2 -10-3 Pencere kapama ornegi – 1.adim

Sekil 2 -10-4 Pencere kapama ornegi – 2.adim

Kapattiktan sonra

1 pencere kaldi.

Kapatmadan once iki

pencere var.

Page 154: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-149

2. Butun pencereleri kapat (Close all windows) Butun sayfalari gizlemek icin kullanilir,kapatmaz.Gizlenmis pencereyi acmak

icin Screen > Open screen secilmelidir.

Sekil 2-10 -5 Menu bardan secimi

Close all windows

Page 155: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-150

Sekil 2-10 -6 Pencereleri kapatmadan once

Sekil 2 -10-7 Pencereleri kapattiktan sonra

Page 156: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-151

3. Sonraki pencere (Next window) Bir sonraki pencereye gecmek icin kullanilir.Eger son penceredeysek bu islem gercek-

lesmez.

Sekil 2-10 -8 Menu bardan secimi

Next window

Page 157: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-152

Sekil 2 -10-9 Toolbar secimi

Sekil 2 -10-10

Next window

Sonraki pencereye

gecmeden once

Page 158: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-153

Sekil 2 -10-11

4. Onceki pencere (Previous window) Bir onceki pencereye gecmek icin kullanilir.Eger ilk penceredeysek bu islem gercek-

lesmez.

“Next" butonuna bas-

tiktan sonra.

Page 159: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-154

Sekil 2 -10-12 Menu bardan secimi

Sekil 2-10 -13 Toolbardan secimi

Previous window

Previous window

Page 160: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-155

Sekil 2 -10-14

Sekil 2 -10-15

Bir onceki sayfaya

gecmeden once.

Bir onceki sayfaya

gectikten sonra.

Page 161: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-156

5. Kaskat (Cascade) Butun pencereleri kaskat bicimde acar,sekil 2-10-17 ve sekil 2-10-18.

Sekil 2 -10-16 Menu bardan secimi

Cascade

Page 162: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-157

Sekil 2 -10-17 Kaskat gorunumden once

Sekil 2-10-18 Kaskat gorunum

Cascade

Page 163: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-158

6. Yatay sirala (Title Horizontal) Pencereleri alt alta acar ,sekil 2 -10-20 ve sekil 2-10 -21.

Sekil 2 -10-19 Menu bardan secimi

Title Horizontal

Page 164: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-159

Sekil 2-10 -20 Yatay siralamadan once

Sekil 2 -10-21 Yatay siralamdan sonra

Page 165: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-160

7. Dikey sirala (Title Vertical) Sayfalari dikey olarak acar,sekil 2-10 -24.

Sekil 2 -10-22 Menu bar dan secimi

Title Vertical

Page 166: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-161

Sekil 2 -10-23 Dikey siralamadan once

Sekil 2-10 -2 4 Dikey siralamadan once

Page 167: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-162

8. Pencere ozetleri (Windows summary) Acilmis butun pencereler Window menusunun altinda goruntulenir. Gormek istedigimizi

tiklayarak o pencereyi goruntuleriz.

Sekil 2 -10-25 Menu bardan secimi

Page 168: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-163

Sekil 2-10 -2 6 Screen_2 'i secmeden once

Sekil 2-10 -2 7 Screen_2 sectikten sonra

Page 169: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

2-164

2-3-9 Yardim (Help)

Sekil 2-11-1 Yardim secenekleri

1. Icindekiler (Contents) Delta HMI yardim basliklarini goruntuler.

Sekil 2-11 -2 Yardim

2. Screen Editor hakkinda (About Screen Editor)

Screen Editor programinin versiyonu goruntulenir.

Sekil 2 -11-3

Page 170: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-1

Bolum 3 Nesne Fonksiyonlari

Bu bolumde ekran duzenleyici programinda kullanilacak nesnelerin ozellikllerive kullanilmadan once yapilmasi gereken ayarlar anlatilacaktir.

3-1 Nesne Secimi (How to Choose Element)

Nesne secmenin 3 farkli yontemi vardir:

1. Calisma bolgesinde sag butona tiklanarak gelen menuden secilebilir,fig. 3-1 -1. 2. Menu bardan secilebilir,fig. 3-1-2.

3. Toolbardan secilebilir,fig. 3-1-3.

Fig. 3-1-1

Sag tusa basildiginda a-

aci acilan menu

Page 171: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-2

Fig. 3-1-2

Fig. 3-1 -3 Toolbardan secimi

Page 172: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-3

Kullanilacak nesne secildikten sonra calisma bolgesinde sol tusa basili tutularak mause suruklenir ve nesne yerlestirilir,fig 3-1-4.

Fig. 3-1-4

3-2 Buton (Button Element)

Fig. 3 -2 -1 Buton secenekleri

Page 173: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-4

Buton tipi Macro Read Write Fonksiyonu

Set Button ON Yes Yes

Bu butona bastigimizda ayarlanan adresin durumuON olur,tekrar basmamiz adresin konumunu degis-tirmez.OFF etmedigimiz surece ON olarak kalir. Eger butona bastigimiz an bir ON Macro varsa ayni anda gerceklesecektir.

Reset Button OFF Yes Yes

Bu butona bastigimizda ayarlanan adresin durumuOFF olur, tekrar basmamiz adresin konumunu degis-tirmez.ON etmedigimiz surece OFF olarak kalir. Eger bir OFF Macro varsa ayni anda gerceklesecektir.

Maintained ON OFF Yes Yes

Bu butona bastigimizda ayarlanan adresin durumubastigimiz surece ON olur,biraktigimiz zaman OFF olurEger bir ON/OFF macro varsa ayni zamanlarda ger-ceklesir.

Momentary ON OFF Yes Yes

Bu butona bastigimizda ayarlanan adresin durumuON olur ve ON macro gerceklesir.Butona tekrarbastigimizda ayni adres OFF olur,OFF macro ger-ceklesir.

Multistate No Yes Yes

Bu buton icin 1-256 arasinda farkli konum ayarlanabilir.Butona her bastigimizda ayarlarimiza gore ya bir son-raki gorevi yada bir onceki gorevi yapar.Ornek olarak butonun konumu 2 iken basarsak ayarlarimiza gore ya 3.konuma yada bir onceki 1.konuma gecer.

Set value No No Yes

Butona basildiginda deger girebilmek icin ekrana bir tustakimi gelir.Tus takimini kullanarak yazdigimiz sayi Enter tusuna bastigimizda Write adres kisminda belir-tilen bolgeye yazilmis olur.

Set constant No No Yes adrese daha onceden belirlenmis sabit sayi kaydolur.

Increment No Yes Yes After pressing button, HMI will add the setting constant to write address of element.

Decrement No Yes Yes mis adresteki bilgiye ayarlanmis sabit sayi eklenir.Goto

Screen No No No Bu butona basildiginda ekrana belirtilen sayfa gelir.

Previous Main

Screen No No No

Bu butona basildiginda ekrana bir onceki sayfa gelir.

Table 3-2-1 3-2-1 Genel Butonlar (General Buttons)

Bu butonlardan herhangi birisine bastigimizda HMI PLC 'ye ON/OFF sinyallerini yollayacaktir.Bu butonlarin 4 tipi vardir: Set buton, Reset buton, Maintained ve Momentary.

Bu butona basildiginda Write adres kismina yazilmis

Bu butona her basildiginda Write adres kismina yazil-

Page 174: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-5

Fig. 3-2-2 Buton ayarlari

Buton ayarlari:

1. , Butonun yazacagi ve okuyacagi adres.

Input adres

2. , Kullanicinin butonun stilini ve onalan rengini secebilecegi bolumdur.

Durum: ? sonraki veya ?

onceki durum 0. durumda bu yuzden

0. duruma ait sekil ve

Butonun ismi

Buton seklinin ayarlanabi-

lecegi bolum.

Buton icin 4 farkli stilin

secilebilecegi bolum.

Ayarlar sayfasi icin

butonun ustune tiklayin

Buton tipinin secilebilecegi

bolum.

yazilar gorunur.

Page 175: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-6

(Gorunmez buton)

Buton stilleri

3. ,ON/OFF Macrolarin yazilabileci kisimdir,detaylar icin bknz. bolum4

4. ,

,Yazinin fontunun,renginin,buyuklugunun ayarlandigi kisimdir.

5. ,Buton seklinin secilebildigi bolumdur.

6. Buton tipinin degistirilebildigi bolumdur.

Buton tipleri

A. Set: Bastiktan sonra hep ON olan buton. B. Reset: Bastiktan sonra hep OFF olan buton.

C. Maintained: Basinca ON birakinca OFF olan buton.D. Momentary:Basilinca ON,tekrar basilinca OFF olan buton.

7. Butona islevini gerceklestirmesi icin basili tutmamiz gereken surenin ayarlandigi bolum.

8.

Ornek: Kullanici seviyesini belirler.

Durum 0: OFF durumu Durum 1 : ON durumu

Page 176: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-7

ON/OFF buton ornekleri3-2-2 Cok durumlu buton (Multistate)

Her konumdaki sekil ,gorev farkli olabilir.Bir WORD icin 256 ,bir LSB icin 16 ,ve bir Bit icin 2 farkli konum vardir. Secilen birime gore Read/Write adresi degisecektir.

Eger, WORD yada LSB secilirse read/write adres Word olacaktir.Eger,Bit secilirse read/write adres Bit olacaktir.Butona her basisimizda ya bir onceki yada bir sonraki

konumuna gecer.

Fig. 3-2 -3 Multistate ayarlari

Multistate ayarlari:

1. , Multistate butonun okuyacagi ve yazacagi adres.

Konum sayisi:word: 256;

LSB:16; BIT:2

Konum: ? onceki veya ?

sonraki konum0.konumda ve bu

konuma ait texti

gosterir. Butonun ustundeki yazi

Buton sekli

Secilebilecek 4 farkli buton

stili var.

Property sayfasi icin

butona tiklanir.

Page 177: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-8

Adres girisi

2. , ,,

Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.

3. , Butona sekil secilen bolumdur.

4. , : user can Nesnenin stilinin ve onplan renginin ayarlanabildigi bolumdur.

(gorunmez buton)

Nesne stili

5. Nesnenin aktif olmasi icin minimum basili tutulmasi gereken sure.

6. Kullanici seviyesinin ayarlandigi bolumdur.

7. : Multistate buton icin konum sayisidir. WORD icin 1-256 , LSB icin 1-16 ve Bit icin 2 konum secilebilir.

8. Butona bastigimizda bir onceki konumami,bir sonraki konumami gececegini belirler.

Ornek: Birim LSB secilmis ise (D100.0—D100.1----D100.3 -D100.4)

Page 178: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-9

K0=D100.0 ON K1=D100.1 ON K2=D100.2 ON K3=D100.3 ON K4 =D100.4 ON

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 MULTI-DEGER

Multistate uygulamasi3-2-3 Deger Girme (Set value)

Bu tur butona basildiginda ekrana tus takimi gelecektir.Deger girilip Enter'a

basildiginda girilen deger PLC 'nin ilgili datasina kaydolur. Maxsimum ve minimum araliginda deger girilebilir ayrica yazdiktan sonra veya once bit set etme

ozelligide ayarlanabilir (Trigger mode).

Fig. 3 -2-4 Deger girme buton ayarlari

Konum numarasi

ve yazisini gosterir.

.

Butonun ustundeki yazi

Butonun stili

Deger girdikten sonra

veya once set bit islemi

Page 179: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-10

Fig. 3-2 -5 Deger girme buton ayarlari

Deger girme buton ayarlari:

1. ,

Deger yazilacak adres.

2. ,

, Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.

3. ,Butonun seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.

Sol taraftaki ayar kutucu-

gu icin buraya basilir.

Deger birimi

Data formati

Deger araligi

(maximum/minimum)

Virgulden once-sonra

Page 180: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-11

4. ,Buton stilinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.

(Gorunmez buton)

Buton stili

5. , Bir biti deger girme isleminden once yada sonra set etmek icin kullanilir. Not: Bu fonk-siyon ilgili biti sadece ON eder. Eger tekrar ayni bit set edilmek isteniyorsa baska bir

yontemle onceden OFF edilmelidir.

6. Kullanici seviyesini ayarlar.

7. , Data uzunlugunu ve formatini belirler.

8. , Girilebilecek deger araligini belirler.

9. , :Virgulden once-sonra girilebilecek rakam sayisi-

nin ayarladigi kisimdir.Set value butonuna basildiktan sonra ekrana PLC 'nin ilgili adresine (Burada D1000) deger

girebilmek icin bir tus takimi gelecektir

Fig. 3-2-6

Bu tur butona bastiginizda

ekrana tus takimi gelecektir.

Page 181: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-12

3-2-4 Sabit sayi girme (Set Constant) Butona basildiktan sonra HMI ayarlarda belirlenmis sabit sayiyi PLC 'nin ilgili adresine

yollayacaktir.

Fig. 3 -2 -7 Sabit sayi girme

Fig. 3 -2 -8 Sabit deger girmeSabit deger girme ayarlari:

1. , Sabit sayinin kaydedilecegi adres.

Deger birimi

Deger formati

Sabit sayi

Sakla ve cik Saklamadan cik

0.durum ve yazisi

Genel ayarlarin yapilabil-

digi pencere.

Page 182: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-13

2. ,

, Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.

3. ,Butonun seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.

4. ,Buton stilinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.

(Gorunmez buton)

Buton stili

5. ,

Kullanici seviyesini belirler.

7. , : sets the

Deger uzunlugu ve formatini belirler

Bir biti deger girme isleminden once yada sonra set etmek icin kullanilir. Not: Bu fonk- siyon ilgili biti sadece ON eder. Eger tekrar ayni bit set edilmek isteniyorsa baska bir yontemle OFF etmek gerekir.

Page 183: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-14

8. : Butona basildiginda kaydolacak sabit degeri belirleriz.

Ornek:

Butona bastigimizda HMI PLC'nin ilgili adresine (D1000) sabit sayiyi yollayacaktir.

3-2-5 Arttirma/Azaltma(Increment/Decrement)

Bu butona bastigimizda ,HMI PLC 'nin ilgili adresindeki sayiyi arttirip azaltir.Eger deger maximum degeri asicak olursa maximum deger PLC 'ye kaydolur.

Page 184: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-15

Fig. 3 -2 -9 Arttirma/Azaltma buton ayarlari

Fig. 3-2 -10 Arttirma/Azaltma buton ayarlari

Buton yazisi

Deger birimiData formati

+/- miktari

Sakla ve cik Saklamadan cik

Alt ve ust limit

Buton stili

Maximum minimum sinir-

larin atlama miktarinin

ayarlanabildigi bolum

0.konum ve yazisi

Page 185: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-16

Arttirma /azaltma buton ayarlari:

1. ,Arttirilan/azaltilan adres.

2. ,,

Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.

3. , Butonun seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.

4. , Buton stilinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.

(Invisible button)

Element style

5. Butonun tipini yeniden yapilandirmaya gerek kalmaksizin degistirir.

6. Kullanici seviyesini ayarlar.

Ornek:

Page 186: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-17

D1000 datasinin icerigini +/- butonlariyla degistirir.

3-2-6 Sayfa gecisi (Goto Screen)

Butona bastigimizda HMI belirledigimiz sayfayi acacaktir.

Iki sekilde kullanilabilir : 1 . Sayfa Degistir (Change screen):Butona basilinca belirlenen sayfa acilir. 2 . Bir onceki sayfaya git (Back to previous screen):Bu buton bir onceki

sayfayi acar.

Fig. 3 -2-11 Sayfa degistirme

Ayarlar:

1. Uygulamanin gerceklesecegi adres.

Buton yazisi

Gidilecek sayfa

Uygulama adresi

Buton stili

Page 187: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-18

2. , ,

, Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.

3. Butonun seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.

Sayfa gecis secenekleri

4. , Butonun seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.

5. , Buton stilinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.

(Gorunmez buton)

6. : Changes element character directly without Butonun turunu degistirir (Goto screen veya Previous main screen)

Page 188: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-19

7. Kullanici seviyesini belirler.

8. : Gidilecek sayfa numarasi secilir.

Ornek:Farkli butonlarla farkli sayfalara gecis.

3-2-7 Sistem Fonksiyon Butonlari (System Function Button)

Sistem fonksiyon butonlari

Button tipi Makro Read Write IsleviSystem Date &

Time No No No HMI 'in tarih ve zamanini ayarlar

(Yil:ay: gun,saat:dakika:saniye) Password table

setup No No No Kullanici seviye sifrelerini ayarlar

Enter password No No No Sifre koyma imkani saglar. Contrast & Brightness

No No No HMI 'in kontrast/Parlaklik ayari.

Low security No No No Butona basildiginda HMI en dusuk kullanici seviyesine gecer (seviye 0).

System menu No No No Butona basildiginda sistem menuacilir.

Table 3-2-2 Sistem fonksiyon butonlari

Page 189: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-20

Sistem fonksiyon butonlari6 farkli sistem fonksiyon butonu vardir bunlar: System Date & Time,

Password table setup, Enter password, Contrast & Brightness, Low security ve system menu butonlaridir.

Fig. 3-2-12 Sistem fonksiyon buton ayarlari

Ayarlar:

1. , ,

, Yazinin fontu,rengi,karakter buyuklugunu ayarlar.

2. , Buton seklinin secilebilecegi bolumdur.

3. , Buton stili ve onplan renginin ayarlandigi bolumdur.

Konum numarasi ve

yazisinin oldugu bolum.

Buton yazisi

Butonun stili

6 farkli secenek vardir.

Page 190: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-21

(Gorunmez buton)

Buton stili

4. Buton turunun degistirilebilecegi bolumdur.

Sistem butonlari

a. Sistem Zamani&Tarihi(System Date & Time) HMI 'in sistem tarih ve saatini degistirme imkani kilar.Sistem tarih ve zamaninin

degistirilebilecegi kutucugun ekrana gelmesi icin bu tur butona basmak yeterlidir.

Sistem tarih ve zaman ayar kutucugu

b. Sifre tablosu (Password table setup) Bu tur butona basilinca kullanici seviyesine bagli olarak password

tablosu acilacaktir.HMI 'a yukledikten sonra eger sifre kullanici seviyeniz a-yarlanandan asagi ise bu tablo acilmaz.Eger password tablosunu actiysaniz

yalnizca sizin kullanici seviyenizden asagi olan sifreleri gorebilir ve degistirebi-lirsiniz,digerlerini goremez ve degistiremezsiniz.

Password tab losu

Sola tasi

Saga tasiArttirir

Azalt

Page 191: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-22

5.seviye password tablosu

c . Sifre girme (Enter password)

Bu buton sifre girmek icin ekrana digital bir tus takimi ge- tirir.Kullanici seviyesini degistirmekicin kullanilir,En ust kullanici sifresini girilirse

en ust kullanici seviyesine sahip olunur.

Sifre girme sayfasi

d. Kontrast&Parlaklik (Contrast & Brightness) Bu butona basilinca acilan pencereden HMI 'in kontrast ve parlaklik

ayarlari yapilabilir.

Kontrast & Parlaklik ayar penceresi e. Dusuk guvenlik (Low security)

Bu buton kullanici seviyesini en disuk seviye yapar (level 0).Bu ayarlari kullanicinin farkli sayfalara gitmesini ,sistem parametrelerini degistirip hatalara

Onayla ve cik

Sil

Pencereyi kapat Gi iris

Page 192: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-23

sebeb vermesini engellemek icin kullanilir. (Sayfa degistirirkende bu fonk-siyon kullanilabilir)

f. Sistem menu (System menu)

Sistem menu butonuna basildiginda HMI sistem menusu acilacaktir. Uygulamaya geri donmek icin RUN 'a basilmali veya restart yapilmalidir.

5. Uygulamanin kullanici seviyesini belirler.

Ornek:

HMI System Menu

3-3 Ibre (Meter)

Meter options

Ibre tipi S ekil Islevi

Meter (1) Meter (2) Meter (3)

Ayarlanmis adresin degerinin ust limitin ustundemi yoksa alt limitin altindami oldugunu farkli renkler ile goruntulemeye yarar.gs Ayarlar kisminda degerin max/min siniri,skala ve ibrenin rengiayarlanabilir.

Table 3-3-1

Uygulamayi calistir

Yukleme yapilacak

COM port secimi

SMC karti veya dahili

hafizayi sil veya kopyala

Parlaklik ayari

Zaman ayari Kalibrasyon

Sistem ayarlari

Page 193: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-24

Ibre ayarlari penceresinden ibrenin gorunusunu alt ve ust degerleri ve renkleri,bolme sayisini arkaplan rengi ayarlanabilir.Ayarlari yaptiktan sonra HMI otomatik olarak

oransal olarak ayirarak gostergeyi girilen degerlere gore farkli renklerde gosterecektir.

Fig. 3-3-1 Gosterge ayarlari

Sagdaki sayfanin goruntu

lenmesi icin tiklanir.

3 farkli data formati

secilebilir.

Page 194: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-25

Fig. 3 -3 -2 Gosterge ayarlari

1. : Gostergenin okuma yapacagi adres.

2. ,,

Yazinin fontu,rengi,karakter buyuklugunu ayarlar.

Deger birimiDeger

formati

Max./Min.

for inputting

Sol pencere icin

tiklanir.

Enable range

limit setting

Upper/lower bound

Noktadan once ve

sonraki rakam

sayisi

Hedef ve alt ust degerler ayarla-

nabilir secilirse:

Hedef adres =read adres + 3

Ust sinir adres =read adres + 2

Alt sinir adres =read adres +1

Page 195: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-26

3. , Gosterge stili ve onplan renginin ayarlandigi bolumdur.

Standard Raised Sunken

Meter border Style

5. ,

Virgulden once ve sonraki rakam sayisi ayarlanir.

6. , : sets color Alt ve ust sinir bolgelerinin rengini ayarlar.

7. : Ibrenin rengi ayarlanir.

8. ,Olcegin ve rakamlarin rengi ayarlanir.

9. , : sets value

Data formati ve birimi ayarlanir.

10. , : set the max.

Minimumve maximumdegerler ayarlanir.

11. , ,

Hedef deger ayarlanir.

12. , ,

Aralik ayarlanir.

13. :Hedef degerin ve alt ust araligin sabit veya degisken olmasi secenegidir.Ornek olarak hedef deger :sabit secilirse (low limit=9999), 2. degisken

Page 196: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-27

secilirse ,Dn+3 datasinin degeridir .(=D1003) Alt deger:1.sabit secilirse (low limit=0), 2.ayarlanabilir secilirse Dn+ 1 datasinin dege-

rine esittir.(=D100 1) Ust deger:1.sabit secilirse (low limit=2500),2.ayarlanabilir secilirse= Dn+ 2 datasinin de-

gerine esittir.(=D100 2) Ornek:

3-4 Cubuk Grafik (Bar)

Bar type Icon Function

Normal

bar

Deviation bar

Bir adresin icerigini cubuk grafik seklinde cizdirmek icin kul-

lanilir,boylece adresin artan ve azalan icerigi goruntulenmisolur. Degerin alt limitin altinda veya ust limitin ustundemi ol-

dugu farkli renkler kullanilarak gosterilebilir.Ayrica max./min., dege ayarlari,arkaplan renk ayarlarida yapilabilir.

Table 3-4-1

2 cesit cubuk grafik vardir: 1. Normal bar: HMI plc 'den okudugu datayi degeri oraninda cubuk grafik seklinde

gosterir.

2. Deviation bar: HMI plc'den okudugu datayi standart degerle karsilastirir ve standart degerin altinda veya ustunde olarak cizer.

3-4-1 Normal Bar

Page 197: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-28

Fig. 3-4 -1Bar ayarlari

Fig. 3 -4 -2 Normal bar ayarlari

Grafik yazisi

Soldaki pencere icin

tiklanir.

Alt-ust aralik renkleri

Grafik stiliDisplay format secimi.

Deger birimi

Deger formati

Max./Min.

deger araligi Sol pencere icin tiklanir

Aralik ayarlari aktif

Giris deger limiti

Target ve Ust/alt limit ayarlanabilir ise,

Target adres = read adres + 3

Ust limit adresi = read adres + 2

Alt limit adresi = read adres +1

Page 198: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-29

1. : Cubuk grafigin adresi

2. , ,

, Yazinin fontu,rengi,karakter buyuklugunu ayarlar.

3. ,Nesnenin stilini ayarlar.

Standard Raised Sunken

Bar style

4. Cubuk grafikin yonunu secer (Asagidan yukari,sagdan sola vb.).

Grafik yonu

5. , Ust alt sinir rengini ayarlar.

Page 199: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-30

6. , : setting data

Deger birimi ve formatini ayarlar.

7. ,

Max./Min. degeri ayarlar.

8. , ,

Hedef deger secimi.

9. , ,

Aralik secimi.

10. Hedef deger ve ust alt limit degerinin ayarlanabilir secimi.Hedef deger: Sabit secilirse (Alt limit=9999), degisken secilirse =Dn+ 3 adres in in

icerigine esittir.(=D1003) Alt limit degeri: Sabit secilirse (Alt limit=0), Degisken secilirse = Dn+ 1adres in in

icerigine esittir.(=D100 1) Ust limit degeri: Sabit secilirse (Ust limit=2500), Degisken secilirse = Dn+ 2 adres in in

icerigine esittir.(=D100 2) 3-4-2 Sapma Deger Bar (Deviation Bar)

Page 200: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-31

Fig. 3 -4-3 Ayarlar

Fig. 3-4-4 Ayarlar

Grafik yazisi

Ayar sayfasi icin

tiklanir.

Grafik stili2 farkli display

formati secilebilir.

Deger birimi

Max. /Min. sinir

araligi.

Sol pencere icin tiklanir.

Sapma deger siniri

Standart deger ve sapma degeri ayarlanabilir ise,

Standart deger= read adres +1

Sapma degeri=read adres +2

Deger formati

Page 201: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-32

1. : Grafik icin adres secimi.

2. , ,

, Yazinin fontu,rengi,karakter buyuklugunu ayarlar.

3. , : user can Grafik stilini ayarlar.

Standard Raised Sunken Sapma deger grafik stilleri

4. : Display bar action direction Grafik yonunu ayarlar (Yatay,dikey).

Page 202: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-33

5. ,

Deger birimi ve formati ayarlanir.

6. , : setting

Grafik max/min sinirlari.

7. , ,

, ,

: Standart deger ve sapma deger ayari:

Sabit secilirse (ornege gore =0), degisken ise = Dn icerigiyle karsilastirir.

(=D1000) ve standart deger Dn+1(D1001). Eger sapma miktari ust limitdenDn+2(D1002)daha buyuk ise, grafikte bu miktar farkli renklerde gozukecektir.

Ornek:

Read: PLC 'nin ilgili datasinin cubuk grafigi

Page 203: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-34

3-5 Pay Grafik (Pie Graph)

Buton tipi

Icon Islevi

Pie (1) Pie (2) Pie (3) Pie (4)

Belirlenmis adresin degerini pay grafikolarak goruntulemek icin kullanilir.Artan veya azalan pay miktarina gore degerin miktarini.

anliyabiliriz.Deger alt ve ust limitlerin disinda farkli renkler kullani-larak goruntulenir.

4 farkli stilde pay grafik vardir.Ayarlari kullanarak grafigin renklerini alt/ust sinirlari

max., min. degerleri,ayarlayabiliriz.

Fig. 3-5-1 Pay grafik ayarlari

Grafigin yazisi

Ayarlar sayfasi icin

tiklanir.

Grafik stili

Page 204: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-35

Fig. 3-5 -2 Pay grafik ayarlari

1. : Pay grafigin okuyacagi adres.

Deger birimi

Deger formati

Max./Min.

degerleri

Sol pencere icin tiklanir.

Aralik ayarlari

Giris degerin limiti Hedef deger ve alt/ust limit ayar-

lanabilir ise.

Hedef deger = read adres + 3

Ust limit deger= read adres + 2

Alt limit deger= read adres +1

Page 205: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-36

2. , ,

, Yazinin fontu, rengi,karakter buyuklugu ayarlanir.

3. , Grafigin stili ve onplan renginin secilebilcegi yerdir.

4. ,Ust/alt bolge rengi.

5. , : sets data

Deger birimi ve formati.

6. , : sets

Girisin max./min. degeri.

7. , , : sets

Araligin alt ve ust degerleri.

8. : Hedef deger ve ust/alt deger ayarlari secimi .

Hedef deger: Sabit secilirse girilen sayiya esittir.ayarlanabilir secilirse Dn+ 3 adresinin iceregine esittir.(=D1001)

Alt limit degeri:Sabit secilirse girilen degere (low limit=0),ayarlanabilir secilirse Dn+ 2 adresinin icerigine esittir.(=D100 2)

Ust limit ayarlari:Sabit secilirse girilen degere (high limit=2500), ayarlanabilir secilirse Dn+ 1 adresinin icerigine esittir.(=D100 3)

Ornek:

Page 206: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-37

3-6 Indikator (Indicator)

Indikator

tipi Icon Islevi

Multistate

indicator PLC 'nin ilgili kontaginin (on/off) yada adresinin durumunu gosterir

Range indicator

PLC 'nin ilgili bitinin yada adresinin degerini alt sinir

degeriyle karsilastirir,karsilastirma sonucuna gore farkli konumlar goruntulenir.

2 tip indikator vardir: 1. Multistate indicator: PLC 'nin ilgili kontaginin (on/off) yada adresinin durumunu gosterir

Konumnumarasi secilen birime gore degisecektir.(Value: 256 konum, LSB: 16 konum, BIT: 2 konum) Indikatorun gorunusu yazi veya sekil olabilir.

2.Range indicator: PLC 'nin ilgili adresini araligin alt degeriyle karsilastirir,karsilastirma

sonucuna gore ilgili konumu ekranda goruntuler.

3-6-1 State Indicator

State indicator PLC 'nin ilgili bitini goruntulemek icin kullanilir.Bit, LSB veya WORD olarak konum degistiginde ilgili konuma ait mesaji,sekli goruntuleyecektir.Eger adres

onemli bir isaretci,mesaj yada alarm ise state indikator; gorunusunu ,yazisini degistirerekkullaniciyi bilgilendirecektir.

Page 207: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-38

Fig. 3 -6 -1 Indikator ayarlari

1. :State indikatorun okuyacagi adres.

Konum numarasi ve

Konum numarasi

ve yazisi.

Indikatorun yazisi

Deger tipi

Sagdaki pencere

için tiklanir. Konum sayisi

Deger formati

degisme imkani

Page 208: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-39

2. ,

, Yazinin fontunun,renginin,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.

3. , Secilen nesneye resim eklemek için kullanilir.

4. Secilen nesnenin onplan rengi ayarlanir.

5. , : sets value

Adresin birimi ve formati ayarlanir.

Example:

3-6-2 Range Indicators

PLC 'nin ilgili adresini araligin alt degeriyle karsilastirir,karsilastirma sonucuna

gore ilgili konumu ekranda goruntuler.

Page 209: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-40

Fig. 3-6-2 Range indikator ayarlari

Fig. 3 -6-3 Range indikator ayarlari

Konum numarasi

ve degisme imkani.

Konum numarasi ve

yazisi.

Nesnenin yazisi

Deger birimi

Sagdaki pencere için

tiklanir. Konum sayisi.

Deger formati

Soldaki pencere için tiklanir.

Aralik limit

ayarlari

Page 210: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-41

1. : Indikatorun okuyacagi adres.

2. ,

, Yazinin fontunun,renginin,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi bolumdur.

3. ,Secilen nesneye resim eklemek için kullanilir.

4. Secilen nesnenin onplan rengi ayarlanir.

5. ,

Adresin birimi ve formati ayarlanir.

6. : Konum sayisini arttirip azaltma.(Value: 256 konum, LSB: 16 konum, BIT: 2 konum)

Page 211: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-42

7. , , ,

Konumlarin alt deger ayari.Bu bolum sabit yada ayarlanabilir secilir.(KonumKonumun alt degeri Dn+1,2,3… (konum numarasi-1) 'e esittir.

Ornek:

Konum sayisi 5 ve value range =4 olsun,

Range (sabit) 0=400 1=300 2=200 3=100 Range (ayarlanabilir) Dn+1 Dn+2 Dn+3 Dn+4

3-7 Deger Goruntuleme (Data display)

Buton tipi ...ikon islevi

Numeric display Istenilen adresin icerigini goruntuler.

Character display Adresin karakter(ascii) icerigini goruntuler.

Date display HMI tarihini goruntuler.Time display HMI zamanini goruntuler.

Day-of-week display Haftanin gununu goruntuler.

Prestored message Konuma ait mesaji goruntuler.

Moving sign Konuma ait mesaji hareketli olarak goruntuler. 3-7-1 Deger goruntuleme (Num eric Display)

PLC 'nin ilgili adresinin icerigindeki sayiyi goruntulemek icin kullanilir.

Page 212: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-43

Fig. 3-7-1 Numeric display ayarlari

3-7-2 Karakter goruntuleme (Character Display)

HMI; PLC 'nin ilgili bolgesindeki ascii kodlari okuyup karakter olarak ekrandagoruntuleyecektir. (max.uzunluk 28 word)

Virgulden once ve son-

raki rakam sayisi

Data tipi secimi

Goruntulenecek adres

Nesnenin stili

Page 213: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-44

Fig. 3 -7 -2 Karakter goruntuleme ayarlari

3-7-3 Tarih goruntuleme (Date display) HMI 'in sistem tarihini goruntuler.

Okunacak adresAdres goruntuleme

Dizgi uzunlugu

Nesne stili

Page 214: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-45

Fig. 3-7-3 Tarih goruntuleme ayarlari

3-7-4 Zaman goruntuleme (Time Display) HMI 'in sistem zamanini goruntuler.

Tarih goruntuleme formati

Nesne stili

Page 215: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-46

Fig. 3 -7-4 Zaman goruntuleme ayarlari

3-7-5 Haftanin gununu goruntuleme (Day -of-week Display) Haftanin gununu goruntuler.

Nesne stili

Goruntuleme formati

Page 216: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-47

Fig. 3-7-5 Day-of-week display settings

3-7-6 Mesaj goruntuleme (Prestore Message)

PLC 'nin ilgili kontaginin yada bolgesinin durumuna gore mesaj goruntuler.Ayarlar kisminda her konum icin mesajlar yazilablir.

Text kismina tiklanarak gun

ismi degistirilebilir.

Nesnenin stili

Page 217: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-48

Fig. 3 -7 -6 Ayarlari

3-7-7 Kayan mesaj goruntuleme (Moving Sign Display)

PLC 'nin brlirlenmis adresinin degerine gore ilgili konuma ait mesaj kayarak

goruntulenir.Ayarlar kisminda yazinin kayma hizi ve benzeri ozelikleri ayarlanabilir.

Okunacak adres

Konum sayisi

Mesaj goruntuleme

Mesaj

Nesne stili

Page 218: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-49

Fig. 3-7-7 Kayan yazi ayarlari

3-8 Grafik (Graph Display)

Buton tipi Ikon islevi

State graphic

HMI 'i PLC 'ye bagladigimizda HMI 'in ekraninda PLC

tarafindan kontrol edilen farkli resimler goruntulene-cektir.

Animated

graphic

HMI 'i PLC 'ye bagladigimizda HMI 'in ekraninda PLCtarafindan kontrol edilen bir resim goruntulenecektir.

Resmin X ve Y eksenlerindeki konumu plc tarafindankontrol edilecektir.

3-8-1 State graphic

HMI 'i PLC 'ye bagladigimizda HMI 'in ekraninda PLC tarafindan kontrol edilenfarkli resimler goruntulenecektir.

Okunacak adres

Kayan yazi

Konum yazisi

Konum sayisiKayma hizi

Nesne stili

Page 219: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-50

Fig. 3-8 -1 Konum grafik

1. : Okunacak adres

Okunacak data

Resim secimi

State graphic

Konum numarasi

Degisim hizi

Page 220: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-51

2. , Konum resimlerinin secilebilecegi kisimdir.

3. ,

Deger birimi ve formatinin ayarlanabildigi kisimdir.

4. Konum sayisi secilebilir.Eger birim WORDsecilirse,1 -256 konum secilebilir, LSB icin 1-16 konum ,bit ise 2 konum secilebilir.

5. , Konumlarin degisme hizi.

Example:

Okunacak adres = D100 olsun. Secilen konum ve sekilleriden sonra D100 'un degerine gore gorunumu:

D100=1 D100=2 D100=3 D100=4 D100=5 D100=6 D100=7 3-8-2 Animasyon (Animated graphic)

HMI 'i PLC 'ye bagladigimizda HMI 'in ekraninda PLC tarafindan kontrol edilen

bir resim goruntulenir.Resmin X ve Y eksenlerindeki yerini PLC 'nin ilgili datasinindegeriyle belirlenir.

Page 221: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-52

Fig. 3 -8-2 Animasyon ayarlari

1. Animasyonu gerceklestirecek adres secimi.

Animasyon

Okunan adres

Konum sayisi

Page 222: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-53

2. , Resim secilen kisimdir.

3. ,

Deger birimi ve formati.

4. Konum degistiginde bir onceki resmi sil-silme secimi.

5. Konum sayisi secilebilir.Eger birim WORDsecilirse,1 -256 konum secilebilir, LSB icin 1-16 konum ,bit ise 2 konum secilebilir.

Example: Secilen adres =D100 olsun,

Secilen resim ve yeri asagidaki gibi olacaktir.Konum kontrol adresi Dn+1

X-ekseni kontrol adresi Dn+2

Y-ekseni kontrol adresi Dn+3

3-9 Deger girme (Input)

Buton tipi Ikon Islevi

Numeric Entry PLC 'nin bir bolgesine sayisal deger girmek icin kulla-nilir.

Character Entry

PLC 'nin bir bolgesine karakter girisi yapmak icin kulla-nilir.

Okunacak ve yazilacak adres girme imkaniyla kullanici yazdigi girisi yada farkli bir adresin degerini goruntuleyebilir.

Page 223: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-54

3-9-1Deger girme (Numeric Entry)

Fig. 3 -9 -1 Deger girme ayarlari.

Deger birimi

Deger formati

Sol penceri icin

tiklanir.

Max. /Min. ayarlari

Virgulden once ve sonraki

rakam sayisi

Trigger tipi

Okunacak adres

Renk ve stil

ayarlari.

Page 224: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-55

Fig. 3-9 -2 Deger girme ayarlari

1. , Deger girisi yapilacak adres.

2. ,,

Yazinin rengini,fontunu,karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi kisimdir.

3. , : user can Nesnenin stilinin secilebildigi kisimdir.

Standard Raised Sunken

4. , Kullanicinin PLC 'nin belirlenmis bir bitini deger girme isleminden once yada sonraON etmesini saglar.Bu ozellik kullanilarak ilgili bit sadece ON yapilabilir.

Page 225: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-56

5. Kullanici seviyesini belirler.

6. ,

Data uzunlugunu ve birimini secmeye imkan kilar.

7. ,

Girilebilcek Min./Max. deger ayarlanir.

8. ,

Noktadan once ve sonraki rakam sayisi ayarlanabilir.

Ornek: Deger girme butonuna bastigimizda PLC 'nin belirtmis oldugumuz adresine deger

girmemizi saglayacak asagidaki gibi bir tus takimi ekranda belirecektir.

3-9-2 Karakter Girme (Character Entry)

HMI PLC 'nin ilgili bolgesindeki ASCII kodlarini okur ve ekrana karsiliklari

olan karakterleri yazar. (max. uzunluk 28 word)

Girilen deger.

Bastigimizda asagidaki tus

takimi acilir.

Page 226: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-57

Fig. 3-9-3 Karakter girme ayarlari

1. , Giris yapilacak adres.

Nesne stili

Page 227: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-58

2. , ,

, Yazinin rengi,fontu ve karakter buyuklugunun ayarlandigi kisimdir.

3. ,Nesnenin stili.

Standard Raised Sunken

4. Kullanici seviyesinin ayarlanabildigi kisimdir.

Ornek: Butona bastigimizda HMI 'in ekranina, karakter girisi yapabilecegimiz bir klavye

gelecektir.

Karakter girisi butonuna

bastigimizda asagidaki

pencere acilacaktir.

Page 228: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-59

3-10 Egri (Curve)

Curve tipi Ikon Islevi

Trend graph

PLC 'nin belirlenmis adresindeki degerin degisimini grafiksel olarakyalnizca Y ekseni boyunca gosterir.

X-Y Chart PLC 'nin belirlenmis adresindeki degerin degisimini grafiksel olarak. The X ve Y ekseni boyunca gosterir.

Egri olusturulurken ilk once “curve field total” kismindan egri sayisi ayarlanmalidir.(1 -4 araliginda secilebilir). Daha sonra,okunacak adres ,egri kalinligi rengi ve deger ayar-

lari yapilmalidir. 3-10-1 Degisim grafigi (Trend Graph)

HMI ,PLC 'nin ilgili adresinin dizi olarak iceriginin degisimini goruntuler.Ornek olarak 100 ornek noktasi ve 4 egri secilmis olsun.Boyle bir secimde 100 X 4 =400 bolge

olacaktir.Delta PLC 'nin okunacak adresi D0 secelim.Bu durumda 400 word okunacaktir. (D0~D399). Ayarlarimiza gore 1.egri D0~D99 datalarini 2.egri D100 ~D199 datalarini,3.egri

D200 ~D299 datalarini, 4.egri D300~D399 datalarinin icerigini Y ekseni boyunca cizer.Eger maxsimum degerin uzerinde bir deger varsa maximum olarak,eger minimum degerin

altinda bir deger varsa minimum deger olarak goruntulenir.Ayarlardan sonra;okuma isleminibaslatacak kontrol adreside girilmelidir. (bknz. bolum 5)

Page 229: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-60

Fig. 3 -10-1 Trend grafik ayarlari

Fig. 3-10 -2 Trend grafik ayarlari

Toplam egri sayisi

Soldaki pencere

icin tiklanir.

Grafik stili

Page 230: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-61

Trend grafik ayarlari

1.

Grafigin renk ayarlari,stil ayarlarinin yapildigi bolumdur.

Standard Raised S unken Trend grafik stilleri

2. : Okunacak ornek adres sayisini belirler.

Okuma islemi bitince ornekleme islemide biter.

3. :PLC datasinin formatini belirler.

4. : Okunacak adresi belirler.

5. : Tetikleyici set eder,islem bayragini temizler.Islem

bayragi tetiklendiginde HMI okumaya ve egri cizmeye baslar.

6. : Egrilerin detay ayarlarini yapar.

7. , : Max./Min.

Y ekseni max/min degerleri.Eger okunan degerler bu ayarlarin altinda veya ustunde iseHMI ayrlarnan degerleri goruntuleyecektir.

8. , : setting

Egri genisligi ve renk ayari.

Ornek:

Page 231: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-62

3-10-2 X-Y Grafik (X-Y Chart)

HMI ,PLC'nin ilgili adresinden itibaren bir dizi bilgiyi X-Y ekseni boyunca grafik-sel olarak goruntuler.Ornek olarak,100 ornekleme noktasi ve 4 egri secilmis olsun.

Boyle bir secimde 100 X 4 X 2= 800 nokta belirlenmis olacaktir.Yine ornek olarakX ekseni adresi Delta PLC'nin D0 ve Y ekseni adresi D500 bolgesi secilmis olsun,

HMI bu durumda 800 nokta okuyacaktir.(D0~D399 ve D500~D899).1.egri X ekseni boyunca D0 ~D99,Y ekseni boyunca D500~D599 adreslerinin degerini;2.egri X ekseni

boyunca D100 ~D199,Y ekseni boyunca D600~D699 adreslerinin degerini;3.egriX ekseni boyunca D200 ~D299,Y ekseni boyunca D700~D799 adreslerinin degerini

4.egri X ekseni boyunca D300 ~D399,Y ekseni boyunca D800~D899 adreslerinin de-gerini goruntuler.X-Y grafigin cizime baslamasi ,temizlenmesi gibi ayarlari icin bolum 5'e

bakiniz.

Page 232: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-63

Fig. 3-10 -3 X-Y Chart ayarlari

Fig. 3 -10-4 X-Y Chart ayarlari

Sol pencere icin tiklanir

Grafik stili.

Toplam egri sayisi

Page 233: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-64

Ayarlar:

1.

Standard Raised Sunken

X-Y Chart style

2.

Okunacak ornek sayisini belirler.

3. : PLC datasinin formatini belirler.

4. ,

Okunacak adresi belirler.

5. : : Tetikleyici set eder,islem bayragini temizler.Islem

Okuma islemi bitince ornekleme islemide biter.

6. :Egri ayarlari girilir.

7. , ,

, Max./Min.

X ekseni/Y-ekseni Max./Min. deger ayarlari girilir.

Page 234: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-65

8. ,

Egri kalinligi ve rengi ayarlari.

Ornek:

3-11 Ornekleme (Sampling)

Gecmisteki datalari tablo halinde veya grafik seklinde goruntuler.Gerekli ayarlar

yapildiktan sonra gecmis datalari okuyabilmek ve grafigi cizdirebilmek icin kontrol adres-sinde girilmesi gerekir.(Bkz.bolum 5)

Page 235: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-66

Fig. 3-11-2 Buffer ayarlari

a . Read address:Okunacak adres.(Ornek D100)

b . Size (word) and total: Okunacak adres sayisi.Ornek olarak 8 giri l irse; D100, D101,D102,...,D107 okunur.

Total:Alinacak ornek sayisi.

Page 236: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-67

c . Stamp time and data: Datanin degerini ve zamani goruntule.

d . Auto stop:Ornek sayisi giri len toplam degeri astiginda orneklemedevam etsin yada etmesin secimi.Ornek olarak,total 5000 secilmis

ve auto stop secilmemis ise,5001'inci okudugu ornek i lk data olarak kaydolur.

e . Trigger: Tetikleyici secimi (HMI veya PLC).Eger PLC secilirse

ayarlar icin bolum 5'e bakiniz.

f. Cycle: Ornekleme zamani.

g. Non-volatile: Elektrik kesintisinde gecmis datalari saklasin saklamasin secimi. 3-11 -1 Gecmis Deger Grafigi (Historical Trend Graph)

Gecmisteki degerleri egri olarak HMI ekraninda cizer.

Fig. 3 -11-3 Historical trend graph ayarlari

Egri sayisi

Page 237: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-68

Fig. 3-11 -4 Historical t rend graph ayarlari.

Ayarlar:

1. , Grafigin renk ayarlarinin yapildigi bolumdur.

2. : PLC'nin ilgili adresini okuyacak buffer secimi.

(Buffer sayisi #1 'den #12 'ye kadar secilebilir.Buffer ayarlari icin

butonuna basilir yada menu bardan Options > History setup.

3. : PLC datasinin formatini belirler.

4. ,

X ve Y eksenin Max./Min. degerlerini belirler.

Sol pencere icin tiklanir.

secilebilir.

Page 238: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-69

5. , ,

: Tarih ve zamanin goruntulenme

formatini belirler.

6. :Egri ayarlari yapilir.

7. : Tetikleme icin okunan ornek numarasini ayarlar.

Okuma isleminden sonra ornekleme biter.

8. ,

Egrinin genislik ve renk ayari.

Ornek:

3-11 -2 Gecmis Deger Tablosu (Historical Data Table)

Gecmisteki datalari tablohalinde HMI ekraninda goruntuler. Buffer numarasi

data no'nun benzeridir.

Page 239: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-70

Fig. 3-11-5 Historical data table ayarlari

Ayarlar:

1. , Tablonun renk ayarlari bolumdur.

2. PLC'nin ilgili adresini okuyacak buffer secimi.

(Buffer sayisi #1 'den #12 'ye kadar secilebilir.Buffer ayarlari icin

butonuna basilir yada menu bardan Options > History setup

3. : PLC datasinin formati secilir.

4. ,

X ve Y eksenin Max./Min. degerlerini belirler.

Sol pencere icin tiklanir.Egri sayisi

Bufer secimi

secilir.

Page 240: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-71

5. , ,

Tarih ve zamanin goruntulenme

formatini belirler.

6. : Egri ayarlari yapilir.

7. : Tetikleme icin okunan ornek numarasini ayarlar.

Okuma islemi bitince orneklemede biter.

8. , Noktadan once ve sonraki hane sayisini

belirler.

Ornek:

3-11 -3 Gecmis Olay Tablosu (Historical Event Table)

PLC 'nin ilgili datasinin icindeki degere gore olay tablosu olusturur.Ayarladigimiz

mesajlari HMI okuma islemlerini tamamladiktan sonra goruntuleyecektir.

Page 241: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-72

Fig. 3 -11-6 Historical event table ayarlari

Ayarlar:

1.

, Yazinin rengini,fontunu karakter boyunu belirler.

2. , Cerceve rengini ve önplan rengini belirler.

3. ,

Data formatini ve konum sayisini belirler. WORD ise 256,LSB ise 16,bit ise maximum

2 konum yazilabilir.

4. : Tetikleme için okunacak örnek sayisi ayarlanir.

Okuma isleminden sonra örneklemede biter.

Konum sayisi

Data No.: bufer numarasi

(1- 12). The historical

buffer addres gecmis mesaj

lar i saklamak ic in kul lani l i r .

Bu fer adres i i l k once be l i r

lenmelidir.

Data type: Eger WORD seci-,

lirse max. 256 mesaj, LSB

secilirse max. 16 mesaj yazi-

labilir.

Page 242: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-73

5. : PLC'nin ilgili adresini okuyacak buffer secimi.

Bufer sayisi #1 to #12 arasinda secilebilir.Bufer ayarlari icin

butonuna basilir veya menu bardan Options > History

6. , ,

: Tarih ve zamanin goruntulenme formatini

belirler.

Example: D100=0

D100=1 D100=2

D100=3

D100=4 D100=5

D100=6

3-12 Alarm

setup secilir.

Page 243: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-74

Alarm tipi Ikon Islevi

Alarm

history table

HMI ,PLC 'nin ilgili bitinin durumunu okur ve ilgili alarm mesajinigerceklesme zamani ile birlikte ekranda goruntuler.

Butun alarm mesajlari saklanir ve alarm listesi olusturulur.

Active alarm list

HMI yalnizca aktif olan alarmi ekranda goruntuler.

Alarm frequency

table

HMI alarm mesaj zamanlarini alt alta goruntuler ve kaydeder.

Alarmlari ayarlamadan once ,PLC'nin ilgili adresini,kaydedecegi alarm sayisini ayarlamakgerekir.

3-12-1 Gecmis Alarm Tablosu (Alarm History Table)

HMI ,PLC 'nin ilgili bitinin durumunu okur ve ilgili alarm mesajini gerceklesme zamani ile birlikte ekranda goruntuler.Gecmis alarm tablosunu olusturmak icin butun

alarmlari kaydeder.

Fig. 3-12 -1 Gecmis Alarm Tablosu

Page 244: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-75

3-12-2 Aktif Alarm Listesi (Active Alarm List)

HMI yalnizca aktif olan alarmi ekranda goruntuler.

Fig. 3-12 -2 Aktif alarm listesi

3-12-3 Alarm Frekans Tablosu (Alarm Frequency Table)

HMI alarm mesaj zamanlarini alt alta goruntuler ve kaydeder.

Page 245: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-76

Fig. 3 -12-3 Alarm frekans tablosu

3-13 Grafikler (Graphics)

Eger menulerde olmayan farkli bir grafik olusturmak istiyorsa asagidaki secenekler

kullanilarak farkli grafikler olusturulabilir.

Fig. 3 -13-1 Grafik secenekleri

3-13-1 Cizgi (Line)

Line secenegini secildikten sonra mausenin sol tusuna basili tutulup istenilen cizgiboyunda suruklenip birakildiktan sonra cizgi olusturulmus olur.

Page 246: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-77

Fig. 3-13 -2 Cizgi ayarlari

Fig. 3-13 -3 Cizgi yonleri Fig. 3 -13-4 Cizgi kalinliklari (1-8) 3-13-2 Dikdortgen (Rectangle)

Bir dikdorgen olusturmak icin 'Rectangle' secenegi secildikten sonra sol tusa

basilir istenilen olculerde suruklenir ve birakilir.

Fig. 3-13-5 Dikdortgen ayarlari

Resim bankasindan resim secimi

Cizgi kalinligi Arka plan Var/Yok

Onplan rengi

Cizgi rengi

Page 247: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-78

3-13-3 Daire (Circle)

Fig. 3-13-6 Daire ayarlariDaire yapmak icin dikdortgen olculeri kullanilir.Eger en=boy ise daire olur,

aksi takdirde elips olur.Dairenin rengini ayarliyabilir yada transparan yapabiliriz.

Fig. 3-13-7 Transparent “No ”iken Fig. 3-13-8 Transparent is “No ”iken

Fig. 3-13-9 Transparent “Yes”iken Fig. 3-13 -10 Transparent “Yes”iken 3-13-4 Cokgen (Polygon)

Her sol tusa basidiginda cokgenin kosesi belirlenmis olur.Butun koseler secildikten sonra

sag tusa basilarak cokgen olusturulur.Renk ve olculeri seceneklerden ayarlanabilir.

Page 248: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-79

Fig. 3-13 -11 Cokgen ayarlari

Fig. 3-13-12 Fig. 3-13-13 Fig. 3-13-14

Fig. 3 -13-15 Fig. 3 -13-16 Transparan cokgen

3-13-5 Yay (Arc)

Yay olusturmak icin mausenin sag tusuna basili olarak suruklenir ve birakilir.

Eger transparan secenegi 'Yes' secili ise cizilen sekil yay olacaktir eger 'No' secili isebir kesme olacaktir.

Fig. 3 -1 3-15 Yay ayarlari

Fig. 3-13 -16 Transparent “No” iken Fig. 3 -13-17 Transparent “Yes”iken

3-13-6 Yazi (Text)

Ekrana yazi yazmak icin kullanilir.Yazinin arka planindaki dikdorgenin renginin gorunmesi icin transparan 'No' secilmelidir.

Page 249: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-80

Fig. 3 -13-18 Text ayarlari

3-13-7 Skala (Scale)

Yonu,skala degerleri olan bir skala olusturmak icin kullanilir.

Fig. 3 -13-19 Skala ayarlari

Yazi girisi

Page 250: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-81

Fig. 3 -1 3-20 Skala ayarlari

3-13-8 Tablo (Table)

Tablo olusturmak icin kullanilir.Hucrelerin olculerini,gorunus ve renklerini ayarlayabilir,farkli elementlerle kullanarak daha islevsel yapabiliriz.

Deger birimi

Deger formati

Sol pencere icin

tiklanir

Min. deger

Max. deger

Tam/kesir sayi

ayarlari

Page 251: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

3-82

Fig. 3-13 -21 Tablo ornegi

Row header:Bas satir rengini ayarlar.

Column header: Bas sutun rengini ayarlar.

Row interlacing: Satirlarin rengini ayarlar.

Column interlacing: Sutunlarin rengini ayarlar

Sep. row evently: Satir olculerini esitler.

Sep. column evently: Sutun olculerini esitler.

Page 252: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-1

Bolum 4 Makro Makrolar ile calismak HMI kullanicisi icin cok uygundur.Olusturulan makrolari online

olarak yada download etmeden offline olarak test etme imkani vardir.

Herbir makro icin 512 satir ve 128 word(max.) uzunlugunda komut yazilabilir.

Sub-macro sayisi 512' ye esittir. (1-512).

Fig. 4-1 Uygun calisma ve kolay anlasilabilirlik icin

makrolari alt makrolar halinde prog-

ramlariz.

Alt-macro makrolar numaralariyla isimlendirilir.

Alt-makro(n) (n=1-512).

Fig.4-2 Yandaki pencerede en sol sutundaki rakamlar alt-macro numarasini belirtir.

512 adet alt-macro vardir ve bunlari 'CALL'

komutuyla calistirabiliriz.

Page 253: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-2

4-1 Makro Tipi (Macro Type)

Fig. 4-1-1 Menubardan makro secimi

Makro ismi Sayisi Aciklamasi

Screen open Macro

1 Her sayfa icin bir sayfa acilis makrosu secilebilir.Toplam sayfa

sayisi n ise n adet sayfa acilis makrosu yazilabilir.

Screen close Macro

1 Her sayfa icin bir sayfa kapanis makrosu secilebilir.Toplam say-

fa sayisi n ise n adet sayfa kapanis makrosu yazilabilir.

Screen Cycle Macro

1 Her sayfa icin bir sayfa dongu makrosu secilebilir.Toplam sayfa

sayisi n ise n adet sayfa dongu makrosu yazilabilir.

Initial Macro 1 Bir programda 1 acilis makrosu vardir. Background

Macro 1 Bir programda 1 arkaplan makrosu vardir.

Clock Macro 1 Bir programda 1 zaman makrosu vardir.

On Macro 1 Bir buton için bir ON makro yazilabilir.

Off Macro 1 Bir buton için bir ON makro yazilabilir.

Sub-macro 512 Bir programda 512 alt-makro kullanilabilir.

Table 4-1-1

Sayfa Acilis Makrosu (Screen Open Macro) Her sayfa icin bir sayfa acilis makrosu yazilabilir.Sayfa acilis makrosu sayfa her acildiginda

bir defa gerceklesir.Sayfa acildiginda bu makro gerceklesmeden diger elementler aktif

Page 254: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-3

hale gelmez.Bu yuzden bu makroyu yazarken programin gecikmesine ve diger ele-

manlarin calismasini engellemeyecek sekilde dikkatli olunmalidir.Tavsiye edilen bu

tur makrolarin gerekmedikce cok uzun olmamasi ve programi HMI'ya yuklemeden

once online veya offline olarak calistirilip testinin yapilmasidir.

Sayfa Kapanis Makrosu (Screen Close Macro) Her sayfa icin bir sayfa kapanis makrosu yazilabilir.Sayfa kapanis makrosu sayfa her

kapandiginda bir defa gerceklesecektir.Sayfa kapanis makrosu gerceklesmeden acilan

yeni sayfanin makrosu gerceklesmiyecektir.Bu yuzden bu makroyu yazarken prog-

ramin gecikmesine ve diger elemanlarin calismamasina sebeb olacak hatalara karsi dik-

katli olunmalidir.

Sayfa Dongu Makrosu (Screen Cycle Macro) Her sayfa icin bir sayfa dongu makrosu yazilabilir.Sayfa dongu macrosu ait oldugu sayfa

her acildiginda gerceklesecek ve sayfa kapanana kadarsurekli devam edecektir. Bu nedenle uzun sayfa dongu makrolari yazimindan gerekmedikce uzak durulmalidir.

Baslangic Makrosu (Initial Macro) Bir programda yalnizca bir baslangic makrosu vardir.Baslangic makrosu programin ba-

sinda bir defa gerceklesir.Eger PLC 'nin ozel bir adresine ozel bir deger yazmak icin

isteniyorsa baslangic makrosu kullanilabilir.

Arkaplan Makrosu (Background Macro)

Bir programda yalnizca bir tane arkaplan makrosu vardir.Bu makro bazi komutlarla

bir defa aktif edilir ve surekli gerceklesir.Eger bu arada baska makrolarda gerceklesi-

yorsa ,ornek olarak dongu makrosu,arkaplan makrosu etkilenmez,beraber gerceklesmeye

devam ederler.Iki makroda ayni zamanlarda (aslinda sirayla)fakat gerceklesme zamani

cok kisa ve surekli oldugu icin ayni zamanda gerceklestikleri kabul edilir.Bu tur makro icin

bir cevrim olusturmaya gerek yoktur END yazilsa dahi makro tekrar gerceklesecektir.

Page 255: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-4

Zaman Makrosu (Clock Macro) Bir programda yalnizca bir tane zaman makrosu vardir.Programla beraber calismaya

baslar ve surekli gerceklesir(dongu makrosu gibi).Bu sebeple gerekmedikce uzun makrolar

yazmaktan kacinilmalidir.

ON Makro (ON Macro)Her kullanilan buton icin bir tane ON makro tanimlanabilir.Butona basildiginda

(Bit ON oldugunda) makro baslar ve birkez gerceklestikten sonra biter.Butona

her basildiginda ON makro birkez gerceklesir ve biter.

OFF Makro (OFF Macro) Her kullanilan buton icin bir tane ON makro tanimlanabilir.Ilgili buton off edildiginde

OFF makro birkez gerceklesir ve biter.Her defasinda buton off edildiginde OFF makro

birkez gerceklesir ve biter.

Alt-makro (Sub-macro) Toplamda 512 alt-makro vardir.Alt-makrolar bir programdaki subrutinlere (alt program)

benzer.Ornek olarak ozel bir fonksiyon icin 10 tane alt-makro varsa bunlari bir makroda

toplayabiliriz.Bu fonksiyonu makro 1'e yazdigimizi kabul edelim.Bu fonksiyonu kullana- bilmek icin bir makronun icine 'CALL 1' yazmamiz yeterlidir.Eger makro 1'de bir degisiklik

yapmak istiyorsak sadece ilgili alt-makroyu degistirmemiz yeterlidir.

4-2 Makro Hazirlama (Macro Edition)

Istenilen makro tipini menu bardan sectikten sonra acilan pencerede bir satira tiklanir ve ve makro yazilmaya baslanir.

Page 256: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-5

Fig. 4-2-1 Makro hazirlamak

Makro yazilabilecek 512 tane satir vardir ( Fig. 4-2-3). Eger programda bos bir satir varsa program guncellendikten sonra bu bos satirlar komut satirina donusecektir(Fig 4-2-4).

Fig. 4-2-4 Makro arac cubugu

Page 257: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-6

Fig. 4-2-3 Makronun son satiri

Fig. 4-2-4 Bos satirlar komut satiri olur

Makro yazmaya baslamak icin bir satira tiklanir ve sekil 4-2-5'deki pencere acilir.Komut

yazmak icin Command butonuna tiklanir ve devam edilir.

Page 258: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-7

Fig. 4-2-5 Makro hazirlama sayfasi

Dosya (File)

Fig. 4-2-6 Dosya

Makro Acma (Open Macro) Uygun makroyu olusturmak icin eski hazirlanmis makrolarda kullanilabilir. Kullanici eski

makrolari acarak istedigi PLC tipinde kullanabilir (Fig.4-2-7).

Page 259: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-8

Fig. 4-2-7 Makro acma

Makro Kaydetme (Save Macro) Hazirladigimiz makrolari daha sonra kullanabilmek icin saklayabiliriz.

.

Fig. 4-2-8 “Save as” Makro

Makro Kapama (Close Macro) Makroyu kapatmak icin kullanilir.

Page 260: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-9

Edition Makrolar icin PLC adresleride kullanilabilir.Eger PLC adreslerini kullaniyorsak makro ayiraclarla diger hafiza makrolarindan ayirt edilecektir.

Fig. 4-2-9 Edition

Geri (Previous)

Secilen satiri bir ust satira kaydirmak icin kullanilir ( Fig. 4-2-10 ve Fig. 4-2-11).

Fig. 4-2-10 1.adim

Page 261: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-10

Fig. 4-2-11 2.adim

Ileri (Next)

Secilen satiri bir satir asagi almak icin kullanilir. (Fig.4-2-12 ve Fig. 4-2-13.

Fig. 4-2-12 1.adim

Page 262: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-11

Fig. 4-2-13 2.adim

Guncelle (Update)

Mevcut satirda yapilan degisiklikleri guncellemek icin kullanilir.Eger degisikliklerden

sonra Update'e basmazsaniz degisiklikler girilmemis olur ve tekrar yazilmasi gerekir.

(Fig. 4-2-14 ve Fig.4-2-15)

Page 263: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-12

Fig. 4-2-14 1.adim

Fig. 4-2-15 2.adim

Ekle (Insert)

Secilen satirin bir ustune yeni bir satir eklemek icin kullanilir. (Fig. 4-2-16 ve Fig. 4-2-17).

Page 264: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-13

Fig. 4-2-16 1.adim

Fig. 4-2-17 2.adim

Sil (Delete)

Secilen satiri silmekicin kullanilir ( Fig. 4-2-18 ve Fig. 4-2-19).

Page 265: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-14

Fig. 4-2-18 1.Adim

Fig. 4-2-19 2.Adim

Komut (Comment)

Page 266: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-15

Secilen satiri tanimlamak kullanilir.Menu bardan yada toolbardan secilebilir.

(Fig. 4-2-20 ve Fig. 4-2-21).

Fig. 4-2-20 1.Adim

Fig. 4-2-21 Step 2 of comment

Command Secilen satira komut girmek icin kullanilir.

Page 267: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-16

Fig. 4-2-22 Menu bardan secimi

Fig. 4-2-23 Komut secenekleri Fig. 4-2-24 Aritmatik islemler

Fig. 4-2-25 Logic islemler Fig. 4-2-26 Data tasima

Fig. 4-2-27 Data transfer Fig. 4-2-28 Karsilastirma

Page 268: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-17

Fig. 4-2-29 Flow kontrol Fig. 4-2-30 Bit ayarlari

Fig. 4-2-31 Haberlesme Fig. 4-2-32 Digerleri

Yardim (Help) Yardim konularina ulasmak icin kullanilir (Fig. 4-2-33).

Fig. 4-2-33 Yardim isteme

Page 269: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-18

Fig. 4-2-34 Yardim konulari

Komut Yazma (Key in) Bazi kullanicilar makrolari klavyeyi kullanarak yazmak isterler.Bu sekilde yazilrsa

program otomatik olarak dogrulugunu kontrol eder. Eger yazimda hata varsa bir uyari

mesaji verir.Operantlar arasinda sinirsiz bosluk birakilabilir.

Fig. 4-2-35 Kalavye girisi

Page 270: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-19

Giris islemi bittikten sonra program guncelleme yada enter tusuna bastiktan sonra

girisi en uygun formata donusturcektir.didn’t verify in this time.

Fig. 4-2-36 Convert to the best format

Eger bir hata varsa hata mesaji verecektir.

Fig. 4-2-37 Yanlis giris

Fig. 4-2-38 Klavye girisi

Eger girisin formati dogru ama kullanilan operant yanlis ise yine hata mesaji verir.

Page 271: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-20

Fig. 4-2-39 Format dogru,operant yanlis

Fig. 4-2-40 Hata mesaji

4-3 Makro Islem komutlari (Macro Operation) Aritmatik islem komutlari (Arithmetic)

Bu kisimda 5 farkli komut vardir., bunlar; ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV ve MOD (Fig. 4-3-1). Her komut icin 3 operant vardir.Herbir operant dahili hafiza bolgesi yada sabit sayi

secilebilir(decimal veya hexadecimal) ,(fakat 3.operant dahili hafiza bolgesi olmalidir).

Birim ise Word, Double Word, Signed ve Signed Double Word secilebilir.

Komut Operant Data tipi Format Not

ADD A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S SUB A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S MUL A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S DIV A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S

MOD A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S

Eger datanin degeri datanin icine sig-

miyorsa fazla olan kisim (tasan kisim)

otomatik olarak atilacaktir.

M— Dahili hafiza, C—Sabit sayi, W—Word, D—Double Word, S—Signed

Page 272: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-21

Fig. 4-3-1 Aritmatik islem secimi

TOPLAMA (ADD) ADD → Toplama islemi, formul: A1=A2+A3. A2 'yi A3'e ekler ve sonucu A1'e saklar. Ornek: A1(Word)=A2(Word) + A3(Word). A1(Double Word)=A2(Double Word) + A3(Double Word). A1(Signed)=A2(Signed) + A3(Signed). A1(Signed Double Word)=A2(Signed Double Word) + A3(Signed Double Word).

Fig. 4-3-2 Toplama

CIKARMA (SUB) SUB → cikarma islemi, formul: A1=A2-A3.A2 'den A3 'u cikarir sonucu A1 'e yazar.

Ornek: A1(Word)=A2(Word) - A3(Word). A1(Double Word)=A2(Double Word) - A3(Double Word).

Page 273: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-22

A1(Signed)=A2(Signed) - A3(Signed). A1(Signed Double Word)=A2(Signed Double Word) - A3(Signed Double Word).

Fig. 4-3-3 Cikarma

CARPMA (MUL) MUL → Carpma islemi, formul: A1=A2 * A3. Ornek: A1(Word)=A2(Word) * A3(Word). A1(Double Word)=A2(Double Word) * A3(Double Word). A1(Signed)=A2(Signed) * A3(Signed). A1(Signed Double Word)=A2(Signed Double Word) * A3(Signed Double Word).

Fig. 4-3-4 Carpma

BOLME (DIV) DIV → Bolme islemi, formul: A1=A2 / A3. (A3 operanti sifir olmamali)

Ornek: A1(Word)=A2(Word) / A3(Word).

Page 274: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-23

A1(Double Word)=A2(Double Word) / A3(Double Word). A1(Signed)=A2(Signed) / A3(Signed). A1(Signed Double Word)=A2(Signed Double Word) / A3(Signed Double Word).

Fig. 4-3-5 Bolme

MOD MOD → Kalan islemi, formula: A1=A2 % A3. A1 (A3 sifira esit olmamali)

Ornek: A1(Word)=A2(Word) % A3(Word). A1(Double Word)=A2(Double Word) % A3(Double Word). A1(Signed)=A2(Signed) % A3(Signed). A1(Signed Double Word)=A2(Signed Double Word) % A3(Signed Double Word).

Fig. 4-3-6 Kalan

Lojik Islemler (Logical Operation)

Page 275: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-24

5 adet lojik islem komutu vardir.Bunlar; including OR, AND, XOR, SHL ve SHR 'dir Her islemin 3 operanti vardir.Herbir operant dahili hafiza bolgesi yada sabit sayi

secilebilir(decimal veya hexadecimal) ,(fakat 3.operant dahili hafiza bolgesi olmalidir).

Datalarin birimleri Word ve Double Word.

Komut Operant Datatipi Format Digerleri OR A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D --

AND A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D -- XOR A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D -- SHL A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D -- SHR A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D --

M— Dahili hafiza, C—Sabit sayi, W—Word, D—Double Word.

Fig. 4-3-7 Lojik islemleri

OR OR → lojik OR islemi, formul: A1=A2 | A3. A2(Word) ve A3(Word) datasinin bit olarak lojik OR kapisina sokar sonucu A1(Word)'e yazar.

Operantlarin birimleri DWord 'de olabilir.

Page 276: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-25

Fig. 4-3-8 OR Fig. 4-3-9 OR islemi

AND AND → lojik AND islemi, formul: A1=A2 & A3. A2(Word) ve A3(Word) datasinin bit olarak lojik AND kapisina sokar sonucu A1(Word)'e yazar.

Operantlarin birimleri DWord 'de olabilir.

Fig. 4-3-10 AND Fig. 4-3-11 AND islemi

XOR XOR → lojik XOR islemi, formul: A1=A2 ^ A3. A2(Word) ile A3(Word)'u lojik XOR kapisina sokar sonucu A1(Word)'e saklar. Operantlarin birimleri DWord 'de olabilir.

Page 277: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-26

Fig. 4-3-12 XOR Fig. 4-3-13 Boolean operation

SOLA KAYDIRMA (SHL) SHL → Sola kaydirma islemi. Formul: A1=A2 << A3. A2(WORD/DWORD) datasinin bitlerini A3 'de yazan sayi kadar bit sola kaydirir.

Sola kaydirma islemiyle birlikte kayan bitin yerine datanin en sag bitine 0 gelir. Eger A1

word ise A3 16 'dan buyuk ise. A1 sifir olacaktir.

Fig. 4-3-14 SHL islemi

SAGA KAYDIRMA (SHR) SHR → Saga kaydirma islemi, formul: A1=A2 >> A3. A2(WORD/DWORD) datasinin bitlerini A3 'de yazan sayi kadar bit saga kaydirir.

Saga kaydirma islemiyle birlikte kayan bitin yerine datanin en sol bitine sifir gelir. Eger A1

word ise A3 16 'dan buyuk ise. A1 sifir olacaktir.

Page 278: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-27

Fig. 4-3-15 SHR islemi

Data Tasima (Data move) 4 adet data tasima komutu vardir.Bunlar;MOV, BMOV, FILL ve CHR 'dir (Fig 4-3-16)

(Cikis yalnizca dahili hafiza olabilir)

Komut Operant Data tipi Format Digerleri MOV A1, A2 P, M, C W, D Data type for A1 only can

be P, M BMOV A1, A2, A3 P, M, C W Data type for A1 and A2

only can be P, M FILL A1, A2, A3 M, C W CHR A1, A2, A3 M, C W A2 is input string

P—PLC, M— Dahili hafiza, C—Sabit sayi, W—Word, D—Double Word

Fig. 4-3-16 Data tasima komutlari

Page 279: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-28

TASIMA (MOV) A2 'deki datayi A1 'e tasir. A1(Word)=A2(Word) veya A1(DWord)=A2(DWord) olabilir. Tasima isleminden sonra A2 'deki datada bir degisiklik olmaz. A1 PLC bolgesi yada HMI bolgesi olabilir.Tasincak bilgi diger cihaza haberlesme hattindan tasinir.

.

Fig. 4-3-17 MOV

BLOK TASIMA (BMOV) BMOV → Blok tasima. BMOV (A1, A2, A3). Bu komut A2 'den baslayarak A3 'deki

sayi kadar datayi blok halinde A1 'den baslayarak yerlestirir.Data formati word'dur.Eger blok uzunlugu dahili hafizadan yada max PLC data bolgesinden daha uzun ise

compile islemi sirasinda ariza verecektir.

Fig. 4-3-18 BMOV

Page 280: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-29

DOLDURMA (FILL) FILL → Doldurma islemi.Ornek olarak, FILL(A1, A2, A3) .Bu komut A1'den basliyarak

A3 'de belirtilen sayi kadar bolgeye A2 'deki bilgiyi yazar.(A2 datasinda bir degisiklik olmaz)

Eger data blogu dahili hafizadan yada max PLC data bolgelerinden daha uzun ise compile

islemi sirasinda hata verecektir.

Fig. 4-3-19 FILL

KARAKTER (CHR) CHR → Karakterleri ASCII kodlara cevirir.Ornek olarak, CHR(A1, “A2”) Bu komut A2 'deki karakter yada karakterleri ASCII 'ye donusturur , sonucu A1'e kaydeder.(max uzunluk 128 word)

Fig. 4-3-20 CHR

Data Donusturme (Data conversion) 11 cesit data donusturme komutu vardir.Bunlar; BCD, BIN, W2D, B2W, W2B, SWAP, XCHG, MAX, MIN, A2H ve H2A (Fig. 4-3-21).

Page 281: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-30

Fig. 4-3-21 Komut secimi

Komut Operant Data tipi Format Digerleri BCD A1, A2 M W, D -- BIN A1, A2 M W, D --

W2D A1, A2 M W, S -- B2W A1, A2, A3 M, C W -- W2B A1, A2, A3 M, C W --

SWAP A1, A2, A3 M, C W -- XCHG A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D -- MAX A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S -- MIN A1, A2, A3 M, C W, D, S -- A2H A1, A2 M, C W -- H2A A1, A2 M, C W --

P—PLC, M— Dahili hafiza, C—Sabit sayi, W—Word, D—Double Word, S--isaretli

BCD BCD → Binary Coded Decimal.BIN bilgiyi BCD formatina donusturur.Ornek olarak, A1 = BCD(A2). Bu komut A2(Integer, Word veya DWord) bilgisini BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) donusturur ve sonucu A1(BCD, Word or DWord) bolgesinde saklar. A2'nin degeri

0~9999 arasinda veya Dword ise 0~99999999 arasinda bir tamsayi olmalidir.

Page 282: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

4-31

Fig. 4-3-22 BCD

BIN Binary Coded Decimal → BCD bilgiyi BIN 'ye donusturur.Ornek olarak,A1 =BIN(A2). komutu A2(BCD, Word or DWord) bilgisini BIN bilgiye donusturur ve sonucu A1(BIN,Word, DWord) bolgesine kaydeder.A2 'nin degeri 0~9999 arasinda yada Dword ise 0~99999999

arasinda bir tam sayi olmalidir.

Fig. 4-3-23 BIN

W2D W2D → WORD bilgiyi DOUBLE WORD yapar.Ornek olarak, A1 = W2D(A2) komutu

A2 (Integer, Word) bilgisini double word (Integer, DWord) yapar ve sonucu A1 (Dword,signed veya unsigned) bolgesine kaydeder.A2 'nin (Word,unsigned) degeri 0~65535 arasinda yada A2 'nin (Word, signed) degeri -32768~32767 arasinda bir tam sayi

olabilir.

Page 283: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-1

Bolum 5 Sistem Kontrol

Iki yollu haberlesmelerde ve DOP serisi ile tum markalardaki PLC'leri haberlestirebilmek icin HMI 'in kontrol ve durum bolgelerinin adreslerini bilmemiz gerekir.Bu ayarlara menubar-

dan Options > Model parameter secenekleriyle ulasilabilir.

Fig. 5 -1 Model parametere ayarlari

Fig. 5-2 Haberlesme Ayarlari

Page 284: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-2

5-1 Kontrol Bolgesi (Control Area)

DOP serisi sistem kontrolunde cok onemli fonksiyonlarin gerceklestigi bolgedir.HMIPLC 'den kontrol edilebilir. Bu bolge sistem kontrol parametreleri ayarlari kismindan

ayarlanabilir.Bu bolge bir data blogundan olusur ve uzunlugu kullanilan fonksiyona gore 0 ile 8 WORD arasinda secilebilir. Ornek olarak recete fonksiyonu icin minimum 8

WORD secilmelidir.Her Word'un aciklamasi asagida mevcuttur.

Word

Numarasi Bolge Numarasi

0 S ayfa Numarasini Belirleyen Bolgedir.(SNIR)

1 Ko ntrol Flag Bolgesi (CFR) 2 E gri (Curve) Kontrol Bolgesi (CUCR) 3 Gecmis Ornekleme Bufferi Kontrol Flag Bolgesi (HBSR) 4 Gecmis Buffer'ini Temizleme Kontrol Flag Bolgesi (HBCR)

5 Recete Kontrol Bolgesi (RECR) 6 Recete Sayisi Bolgesi (RBIR) 7 Kontrol Flag Bolgesi 2 (CFR2)

n Sayfa Numarasini Belirleyen Bolge (SNIR)

Word Foksiyon

0 Sayfa degistirmek icin kullanilir.

SN IR ( Dn) bolgesi PLC 'den sayfa gecisini saglar.Ornek olarak Dn=D0 ise D0 bolge-sindeki sayi kac ise HMI o sayfayi acar.

n Kontrol Flag Bolgesi (CFR)

Bit Numarasi Foksiyon

0 Kullanilmaz

1 Ekran isigini kapatir. 2 Ekranin sesini kapatir.

3 Alarm buffer'i temizler. 4 Alarm counter'i temizler.

5-15 Kullanilmaz.

n Ekran Isigini Kapatma

Ekran isigini PLC'den acip kapatabiliriz.Eger Bit 1 'i On yaparsak isik soner,Off yaparsakisik yanar.

Page 285: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-3

n Sesi KapatmakHMI sesini PLC'den kontrol edebiliriz.Eger Bit 2 'yi On yaparsak ses kapanir,Off ise ses

acilir.

n Alarm Bufferi Temizleme

PLC 'den alarm buferi temizlemek icin Bit3 'u 1 sn boyunca On-Off etmek yeterlidir. .

n Alarm Counteri Temizleme

PLC 'den alarm sayicisini temizlemek icin Bit3 'u 1 sn boyunca On-Off etmek yeterlidir..

n Egri (Curve) Kontrol Bolgesi (CUCR)

Bit Numarasi Foksiyon 0 Egri ornekleme kontrol bayragi 1

1 Egri ornekleme kontrol bayragi 2 2 Egri ornekleme kontrol bayragi 3 3 Egri ornekleme kontrol bayragi 4

4-7 Kullanilmaz

8 Egri temizleme bayragi 1 9 Egri temizleme bayragi 2 10 Egri temizleme bayragi 3

11 Egri temizleme bayragi 4 12-15 Kullanilmaz

n Egri Ornekleme Kontrol Bayragi (1 -4)

HMI egri orneklemesi PLC tarafindan kontrol edilebilir. Eger Bit0— Bit3 'den biri1 sn On-Off edilirse , HMI bir defa ilgili egri icin datalari okuyup bunlari egri grafik

yada XY grafik olarak goruntuleyecektir..

n Egri Temizleme Bayragi (1 - 4)

PLC'den HMI'in cizdigi egriyi temizleyebiliriz.Eger Bit8— Bit11'den hangisini 1 sn

boyunca ON/OFF yapar isek o egriyi temizlemis oluruz.

n Gecmis Ornekleme Buffer'i icin Kontrol Flag Bolgesi ( HBSR)

Bu ayarlardan once PLC 'nin adresini ayarlanmis olmalidir.Bufer orneklenmis datalarinHMI hafizasinda saklandigi bolgedir.Bufer adresinin ve uzunlugunun ayarlandigi ki-

simlar daha onceden anlatilmistir.

Page 286: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-4

Fig. 5-3 Buffer parametere ayarlari (max. 12 kayit)

HMI, 12 orneklemenin buferlarinda saklanmasina.Bunun yaninda HMI orneklemezamaninin ayarini,ornek sayisini,gecmis buferi PLC 'iden temizleme imkanida kilar.

Her örnekleme yada temizleme 2 bolge tarafindan kontrol edilir.

Bit Numarasi Fonksiyon

0 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 1 1 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 2

2 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 3 3 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 4

4 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 5 5 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 6 6 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 7

7 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 8 8 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 9 9 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 10 10 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi 11

11 Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi12 12 -15 Kullanilmaz

n Gecmis ornekleme buferi kontrol bayragi HMI 'in ornekleme yapmasi PLC 'den kontrol edilebilir.Bir defa ornekleme bayragi

(sampling flag)tetiklenirse (1 sn ON yapilirsa) bir defa ornekleme y apar.Tekrar tetiklemeyapabilmek icin bayragi Off yapmamiz gerekir.

Page 287: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-5

[Ornek] Delta PLC:

(1) Kontrol blogu D0 'dan itibaren 6 bolge olsun.

(2) PLC 'de bufer#1 'in okuyacagi bölge D200 olsun .

(3) Bufer #1'in genisligi ise 3 WORD olsun.

Bu durumda, PLC D200-D202 datalarini kaydettikten sonra D3 datasinin 0.bitini setedecektir.HMI 0.bitin Off 'dan On 'a gectigini gorunce,D200-D202 datalarini PLC 'den

otomatik olarak okuyup orneklenmis bir sekide backup RAM 'de saklayacaktir.

n Gecmis Buferini Temizleme Kontrol Flag Bolgesi (HBCR)

Bit Numarasi Fonksiyon 0 1.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 1 2.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler.

2 3.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 3 4.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler.

4 5.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 5 6.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 6 7.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler.

7 8.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 8 9.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 9 10.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 10 11.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler.

11 12.Gecmis bufer bayragini temizler. 12-15 Kullanilmaz

n Gecmis Buferini Temizleme.

HMI'in cizmis oldugu trend grafigi PLC 'den temizleyebiliriz.Kontrol bayragini bir defa te-

tikledikmi (1 sn On etmek gerekir) grafigi cizen buferi temizleyecektir.Bayragi tekrar tetik-leyebilmek icin Off etmeliyiz.

n Recete Kontrol Bolgesi (RECR)

Bit Numarasi Fonksiyon 0 Recete numarasi degistir. 1 Receteyi oku. (PLC >HMI)

2 Receteyi yaz (HMI >PLC) 3-15 Kullanilmaz.

n Recete Yazma Kontrol Bayragi

Page 288: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-6

PLC 'ye recete yazmak icin recete numarasini (N) kontrol bolgesine (RNR) yazmaliyiz.

(RNR),(Dn+5) ve kontrol bayragi bit #4 ON edilmelidir.Tekrar tetiklenebilmesi icin bay- ragi OFF etmeliyiz.

Ornek olarak:

Eger PLC 'ye 4 nolu recete yazilmak istiniyorsa (RCPNo=4), yazma kontrol bitibit#2 set edilir.(D5=4)

n Recete Numarasi degistirme

RCPNo hazirlanan recetelerin numaralarinin kaydedildigi dahili hafiza bolgesidir.

RCPNo degerini belirlenmis recete numarasi bolgesine (RBIR , Dn+ 6) recete numa- rasi (N) yazilarak ve recete numarasi kontrol bolgesinin (RECR) ilgili bayragi bit0

ON yapilarak (1 sn) degistirilebilir. Bu islemden sonra RCPNo degisecek ve receteyeait recete datalari (RCPW0-RCPWm) goruntulenecektir.Bu islemleri tekrar gerceklestire-

bilmek icin ayni bit OFF edilip tekrar ON edilmelidir.

n HMI 'ya Recete Yukleme

PLC 'den HMI 'ya recete yukleyebilmek icin ,recete numarasi recete numarasi bolge-

sine (RBIR ) Dn+6 yazilmali ve kontrol bolgesinin bit #1 'i ON edilmelidir (1 sn).ON (about 1 second).Fakat bu islemleri tekrar gerceklestirebilmek icin ayni bit OFF edi-

lip tekrar ON edilmelidir.

Ornek olarak:

Eger PLC 'deki datalar 12 numarali recete olarak kaydetmek istenirse D5 'in

1.biti ON edilmelidir (D5=2).

n Recete Numarasi Bolgesi ( RBIR)

Word Fonksiyon

0 Recete numarasi

RCPNo ,goruntulenmek yada aktarilmak istenen recetenin numarasini kontrol edildigi

dahili hafiza bolgesidir.Baska bir deyisle RCPNo degistirilerek aktarilacak recetededegistirilmis olur.

5-2 Durum Bolgesi (State Area)

Iki yollu haberlesmelerde ve DOP serisiyle tum markalardaki PLC'leri haberlestirebilmek icin

karsi cihazin verecegi cevaplarin gelecegi bölge belirlenmelidir.DOP serilerinde durum bolgesi bir data blogudur Dm=D10 (uzunlugu 7 WORD = D10-D16) gibi.Bu blogun gorevi

ve aciklamalari asagida verilmistir.

Page 289: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-7

Word Numarasi Fonksiyonu 0 Genel Kontrol Durum Bolgesi (GCSR) 1 Sayfa numarasi Durum Bolgesi (SNSR)

2 Egri (Curve) Kontrol Durum Bolgesi (CCSR) 3 Gecmis Ornekleme Bufferi Durum Bolgesi(HSSR)

4 Gecmis Ornekleme Bufferi Temizleme Durum Bolgesi (HCSR) 5 Recete Durum Bolgesi (RESR) 6 Recete Numarasi Durum Bolgesi (RBSR)

n Genel Kontrol Durum Bolgesi (GCSR)

Bit Number Function

0 Sayfa durumu 1 -2 Kullanilmaz

3 Alarm Buffer temizleme durumu 4 Alarm Counter temizleme durumu

5 -7 Kullanilmaz 8 Kullanici seviyesi (Bit0) 9 Kullanici seviyesi (Bit1) 10 Kullanici seviyesi (Bit2)

11 Kullanici seviyesi (Bit3) 12 -15 Kullanilmaz

n Sayfa Durumu

Sayfa degisirken bu bit ON olur islem gerceklestikten sonra OFF olur.

n Kullanici Seviyesi Durumu

HMI calisiyorken kullanici seviyeleri:

Kullanici seviyesi 0 ==>bit8=Off , bit9=Off , bit10=Off

Kullanici seviyesi 1 ==>bit8=ON, bit9=Off, bit10=Off

Kullanici seviyesi 2 ==>bit8=Off , bit9=ON, bit10=Off

Kullanici seviyesi 3 ==>bit8=ON, bit9=ON, bit10=Off

Kullanici seviyesi 4 ==>bit8=Off , bit9=Off , bit10=ON

Kullanici seviyesi 5 ==>bit8=ON, bit9=Off, bit10=ON

Kullanici seviyesi 6 ==>bit8=Off , bit9=ON, bit10=ON

Kullanici seviyesi 7 ==>bit8=ON, bit9=ON, bit10=ON

Kullanici seviyesi 8 ==>bit8=Off , bit9=Off , bit10=Off, bit11=ON

Page 290: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-8

n Sayfa Numarasi Durum Bolgesi

Word Fonksiyon

0 Acik olan sayfa numarasi

n Acik Olan Sayfa NumarasiAcik olan sayfa numarasi sayfa numarasi SNSR (Dm) durum bolgesinde saklanir.

Sayfa degistirildiginde yeni sayfa numarasi bu bolgeye kaydolur.

n Egri Kontrol Durum Bolgesi (CCSR)

Bit Numarasi Fonksiyon

0 Egri 1 ornekleme durumu 1 Egri 2 ornekleme durumu

2 Egri 3 ornekleme durumu 3 Egri 4 ornekleme durumu8 Egri 1 temizleme durumu

9 Egri 2 temizleme durumu10 Egri 3 temizleme durumu

11 Egri 4 temizleme durumu 4-7;12 -15 Kullanilmaz

n Egri Temizleme Durumu

HMI 'in cizmis oldugu egri yada XY grafik PLC'den temizleniyorsa,Egri kontrol durum

bolgesinin (D12) Bit08 -- Bit11 bitleri temizleme isleminden sonra ON olacaktir.Egri temizleme kontrol bolgesi bitleri (bit08-11) Off oldugunda bu bitlerde OFF olacaktir.

n Egri Ornekleme Durumu

Egri yada XY grafigi PLC 'den kontrol ediliyorsa,egri örnekleme durum bolgesi (D12) bitleri Bit0 — Bit3 orneklemeden sonra ON olur.Egri kontrol bolgesi D2 'nin ilgili bitleri

(bit0-3) Off oldugunda ,egri ornekleme durumbitleride OFF olur.

n Gecmis Buferin Ornekleme Durum Bolgesi (HSSR)

B it Numarasi Fonksiyon

0 Gecmis bufer 1 ornekleme durumu 1 Gecmis bufer 2 ornekleme durumu

2 Gecmis bufer 3 ornekleme durumu 3 Gecmis bufer 4 ornekleme durumu 4 Gecmis bufer 5 ornekleme durumu 5 Gecmis bufer 6 ornekleme durumu

6 Gecmis bufer 7 ornekleme durumu

Page 291: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-9

Bit Number Function 7 Gecmis bufer 8 ornekleme durumu 8 Gecmis bufer 9 ornekleme durumu

9 Gecmis bufer 10 ornekleme durumu 10 Gecmis bufer 11 ornekleme durumu

11 Gecmis bufer 12 ornekleme durumu 12 -15 Kullanilmaz

n Degisim Grafigi Ornekleme Durumu

Degisim grafigi PLC 'den kontrol ediliyorsa, ornekleme durum bolgesi (D13) bitleri Bit0 -

Bit11 orneklemeden sonra ON olur.Ornekleme kontrol bolgesi D3 'un ornekleme kontrolbitleri Off oldugunda ornekleme durum bitleride OFF olur.

n Gecmis Buferini Temizleme Durum Bolgesi (HCSR)

Bit Number Function 0 Gecmis bufer 1 temizleme durumu 1 Gecmis bufer 2 temizleme durumu

2 Gecmis bufer 3 temizleme durumu 3 Gecmis bufer 4 temizleme durumu 4 Gecmis bufer 5 temizleme durumu

5 Gecmis bufer 6 temizleme durumu 6 Gecmis bufer 7 temizleme durumu 7 Gecmis bufer 8 temizleme durumu 8 Gecmis bufer 9 temizleme durumu

9 Gecmis bufer 10 temizleme durumu 10 Gecmis bufer 11 temizleme durumu

11 Gecmis bufer 12 temizleme durumu 12 -15 Kullanilmaz.

Degisim grafigi PLC 'den kontrol ediliyorsa ,durum bitleri (D14) Bit #0 --#11 ON olacaktir.Kontrol bitleri (D4 bolgesinin) Off oldugunda bu bitlerde OFF olur.

.

n Recete Durum Bolgesi (RESR)

Bit Numarasi Fonksiyon 0 Recete numarasi degisim durumu 1 Recete okuma durumu (PLC > HMI)

2 Recete yazma durumu (HMI > PLC)

3-15 Kullanilmaz.

Page 292: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-10

n Recete Okuma Durumu

PLC 'den HMI 'ya recete transferi yapildiktan sonra,recete okuma kontrol biti BIT#1 (D16 bit1 )

ON olur.Recete kontrol biti (D16 bit1 ) Off oldugunda ,recete okuma durum bitide OFF olur..

n Recete Numarasi Durumu

Recete numarasi kontrol biti BIT#0 (D6 bit0 ) ON oldugunda,recete numarasinin degistigini

belirten bitte BIT#0 (D16 bit0 ) ON olur.degisme isleminden sonrada OFF olur..

n Recete Yazma Durumu

HMI 'dan PLC 'ye recete yazildiktan sonra, recete yazma durum biti BIT# 2 (D 16 bit2) ON olur.Recete kontrol biti Off (D6 bit2 ) oldugunda recete yazma durum bitide OFF olur.

.

n Recete Numarasi Durum Bolgesi (RBSR)

Word Fonksiyon

0 Kullanilan recetenin numarasi

Recete numarasi RCPNo PLC 'den veya HMI 'dan degistiginde recete numarasi durum

bolgesi (RBSR) (Dm+6) degisecektir.O anda kullanilan recete numarasi bu bolgede kaydolur,eger istenilirse goruntulenebilir.

5-3 Dahili Hafiza

n Dahili Hafiza Bolgesi (Okunabilir/Yazilabilir ) : $ Her bolge 1 word : $n (n : 0~ 65535) Her bolge 16 bit : $n.b (n : 0~65535, b: 0~15)

HMI 'da toplamda 16 bitlik 65536 dahili hafiza bolgesi ($0 ~ $65535) vardir.

n Kalici Dahili Hafiza Bolgesi (Okunabilir/Yazilabilir) : $M Her bolge 1 word : $Mn (n : 0~1023 ) Her bolge 16 bit : $Mn.b (n: 0~1023, b: 0~15)

HMI 'da toplamda 16 bitlik 1024 kalici dahili hafiza bolgesi ($0 ~ $1023) vardir.

n Kontrol Bolgesi (Okunabilir): CTRL Her bolge 1 word : CTRLn (n: 0~ Kontrol bolgesi buyuklugu -1)

Her bolge 16 bit : $CTRL.b (n : 0~ Kontrol bolgesi buyuklugu –1, b : 0~15) HMI 'in kontrol bolgesi PLC 'nin kontrol bolgesinden okunan datalarin saklandigi yerdir.

Kontrol bolgesi yalnizca okunabilir.Kontrol bolgesi buyuklugu ekran programi hazirlanirkenbelirlenen (model parametreleri-kontrol bolgesi) kontrol bolgesi ile aynidir.

n Recete Numarasi Bolgesi (Okunabilir/Yazilabilir): RCPNO

Page 293: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

5-11

Recete numarasinin belirlendigi 16 -bitlik bolgedir.Toplam recete sayisi 64K olabilir.Recete hazirlanirken toplam recete sayisi ve bir recetenin uzunlugu belirlenir.

PLC recete numarasina gore bir receteyi okur veya bir receteye yazar..

n Recete Degerleri Bolgesi (R/W): RCPn HMI 'da recete degerlerinin saklandigi bolgedir.Bu degerler HMI programi hazirlik a-

samasinda iken belirlenip HMI'ya yuklenebilir.Bu bolgelere okuma/yazma yapmanin 2 yontemi vardir.Recete uzunlugunun L ve recete numarasinin N oldugunu dusunulurse

1. Recete Numarasini kullanarak:Bu yontemde recete numarasi ve degerleri kullanilir. Ornek olarak RCPNO=3 ele alinirsa, HMI 3 numarali recetenin datalarini

RCP0~RCP (L-1) 'dan okur ve daha sonra PLC RCPNO 3'un datalarini RCP0~RCP (L-1) bu bolgeden okur.Bu bolge musterek bolgede sayilabilir.

2. Tam adres kullanilarak:Bu yontem kullanilacak recetenin deger sayisi RCP (L-1)'den

buyukse kullanilir.Bu durumda 1.recetenin recete degerlerinin baslangic adresi RCP (1XL) 2. recetenin recete degerlerinin baslangic adresi RCP (2XL) olur.O halde,

n.recetenin m. wordu RCP (nxL+m) olacaktir.

RCP0 RCP1 RCP2 RCP (L-1)...

1xL 1xL+1 1xL+2 1xL+(L-1)2xL 2xL+1 2xL+2

...

...

...

2xL+(L-1)

...

NxL NxL+1 NxL+2 NxL+(L-1)

RCP0=1RCP0=2

RCP0=N

RCP0=X; (1<=X<=N)

Page 294: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 295: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 296: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 297: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 298: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 299: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 300: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 301: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 302: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 303: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 304: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 305: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr
Page 306: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

20080122

Se

rie

s H

MI C

on

ne

ctio

n M

an

ua

l

Series HMI Connection Manual

ASIA

AMERICA

EUROPE

Delta Electronics, Inc. Taoyuan131-1, Xingbang Road, Guishan Industrial Zone,Taoyuan County 33370, Taiwan, R.O.C.TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-362-7267

Delta Electronics (Jiang Su) Ltd. Wujiang Plant31688 Jiangxing East Road, Wujiang Economy Development Zone, Wujiang City, Jiang Su Province, People's Republic of China (Post code: 215200)TEL: 86-512-6340-3008 / FAX: 86-769-6340-7290

Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.Tokyo Office Delta Shibadaimon Building, 2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-Ku, Tokyo, 105-0012, JapanTEL: 81-3-5733-1111 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1211

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.Donghwa B/D 3F, 235-6, Nonhyun-dong, Kangnam-gu, Seoul 135-010, KoreaTEL: 82-2-515-5303/5 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302

Delta Electronics (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.8 Kaki Bukit Road 2, #04-18 Ruby Warehouse Complex, Singapore 417841TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228

Delta Products Corporation (USA)Raleigh OfficeP.O. Box 12173,5101 Davis Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3939

Deltronics (The Netherlands) B.V.Eindhoven OfficeDe Witbogt 15, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands TEL: 31-40-2592850 / FAX: 31-40-2592851

www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation

*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice

Page 307: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-1

1.1 Pin Definition of Serial Communication

DOP-A Series

COM1

Mode PIN

RS-232

1 N.C

2 RXD

3 TXD

4 N.C

5 GND

6 N.C

7 RTS

8 CTS

9 N.C

COM2

Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 PIN

RS-232 RS-422 RS-485

1 N.C RXD- D-

2 RXD RXD+ D+

3 TXD TXD+ D+

4 N.C TXD- D-

5 GND GND GND

6 N.C RTS- N.C

7 RTS RTS+ N.C

8 CTS CTS+ N.C

9 N.C CTS- N.C

NOTE

1) Mode 3 is for RS-485. Pin 2 & 3 are D+ and pin 1 & 4 are D-.

2) Grounding is highly recommended if RS-485 & RS-422 are used for long transmission.

3) DO NOT connect Frame Ground (FGND) to GND. Please connect FGND to the outer covering of

connector.

4) Transmission speed is relevant to distance and baud rate.

Pin1

Pin1

Page 308: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-2 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

DOP-AE Series

COM1

Mode PIN

RS-232

1 N.C

2 RXD

3 TXD

4 N.C

5 GND

6 N.C

7 RTS

8 CTS

9 N.C

COM2/COM3

Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 PIN

RS-232 RS-422 RS-485 RS-232x2 RS-422x2 RS-485x2

1 N.C RXD- D- N.C RXD- D-

2 RXD RXD+ D+ RXD RXD+ D+

3 TXD TXD+ D+ TXD TXD+ D+

4 N.C TXD- D- N.C TXD- D-

COM2

5 GND GND GND GND GND GND

6 N.C RTS- N.C N.C TXD- D-

7 RTS RTS+ N.C TXD TXD+ D+

8 CTS CTS+ N.C RXD RXD+ D+

COM3

9 N.C CTS- N.C N.C RXD- D-

Pin1

Pin1

Page 309: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-3

DOP AS Series

COM1/COM3

Mode 1 Mode 2 PIN

RS-232 RS-232x2

1 N.C N.C

2 RXD RXD

3 TXD TXD

4 N.C N.C

COM 1

5 GND GND

6 N.C N.C

7 RTS TXD

8 CTS RXD

COM 3

9 N.C N.C

COM2

Mode 1 Mode 2 PIN

RS-422 RS-485

R- RXD- D-

R+ RXD+ D+

T- TXD- D-

T+ TXD+ D+

GND GND

Pin1

Page 310: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-4 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

1.2 Cable for Download

Download via COM Port

RS-232

DOP series HMI 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

PC 9 pin D-SUB female (RS-232)

Controller

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3) (2) RXD

GND (5) (5) GND

RTS (7) (8) CTS

CTS (8) (7) RTS

上視圖

Download via USB Flash Drive

USB Connection

Pin1

Page 311: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-5

1.3 Supported Controllers and Devices

Please refer to the following table for supported controllers and devices provided by DOP series HMI.

Brand Controller Name / Series Name

Delta Controller For Servo/AC drive/Temperature Controller/PLC (984 RTU mode / ASCII mode) Delta

Delta DVP PLC

MicroLogix PLC Allen Bradley

SLC5 PLC

Cimon Loader Protocol

Copley Servo (Stepnet Protocol)

Danfoss VLT 2800 (FC Protocol)

Emerson EC20 Series PLC

Facon FB Series PLC

Festo Festo PLC

GE Fanuc 90 Series SNP PLC

Hitachi EH Series

Hust Hust CNC Controller

Nano Series PLC Jetter

JC Series PLC

Keyence KV/KZ Series

SU/DL Series Koyo

K-Sequence

Lenze LECOM-A/B Protocol

Master-K120S/200S

Glofa GM6 CNET

Master-K CNET LG

XGT CNET

LI YAN LYPLC EX

M2i Master M2i

M2i Slave

Matsushita FP Series

Mirle FAMA SC

Page 312: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-6 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Brand Controller Name / Series Name

FX / FX2N

FX3U

A Series/J71UC24

Mitsubishi A2A/A2AS/A2USH A1SH/A3N/A2ASH CPU Port

Q Series CPU Port

Q Series Computer Link

FX Series Computer Link

Mitsubishi

J2s Series

BY125

CT150 MKS

MC700/720

Modbus (Master) --- 984 RTU / ASCII mode

Hexadecimal Address (Master) --- RTU / ASCII mode

nW (Master) --- RTU / ASCII mode Modbus

Modbus (Slave) --- RTU / ASCII mode

Uni-Telway TSX Micro

Modbus RTU Modicon

TWIDO

Moeller Moeller PLC

NIKKI DENSO NCS-FI/FS Series

C Series

CJ1/CS1 Series Omron

TPM1A

S7 200

S7-300 (with PC Adaptor) Siemens

S7-300 (without PC Adaptor)

Taian TP02 PLC

Vigor M Series

VIPA VIPA PLC

Yokogawa ACE PLC

Page 313: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-7

Delta (Servo/AC Drive/PLC/Temperature) Controller Back to Table

A. HMI factory setting

Baud rate: ASCII: 9600, 7, None, 2.

RTU: 9600, 8. None, 2.

Controller station number: 1.

Control area/status area: None.

NOTE

1) This driver can support all Delta products, i.e. AC drive, PLC, Servo, Temperature Controller and

Modbus standard connection. The users can easily set and communicate with these devices via using

this driver.

2) For people who are using Modbus standard connection:

Modbus / ASCII (Master), Modbus / 984 RTU (Master), Modbus / ASCII Hex Address (Master) and

Modbus / RTU Hex Address (Master) can be compatible with the new Delta controller ASCII and Delta

controller RTU. To change the driver settings, the user only needs to change the “Controller” Option

which is used to set the controller, then the new driver can be used immediately.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

Servo communication address SERVO-n n: 0 ~ 0700h N/A Word

AC drive communication address INVERTER-n n: 0 ~ 2299h N/A Word

TCntrl communication address TEMP_CTRL-n n: 0 ~ 6000h N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_X PLC_Xn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_Y PLC_Yn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_M PLC_Mn n: 0 ~ 1520, N/A Word

1536 ~ 4080 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_S PLC_Sn n: 0 ~ 1008 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_T PLC_Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_C PLC_Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_D PLC_Dn n: 0 ~ 4095, N/A Word

4096 ~ 9999 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_HC PLC_HCn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Double Word

PLC communication address Module PLC_Modulen n: 4000 ~ 4499h N/A Word

Page 314: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-8 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

Output Registers RW-n n: 0 ~ FFFFh N/A Word

Input Registers R-n n: 0 ~ FFFFh N/A Word

Output Registers Wn n: 40001 ~ 50000 N/A Word

Input Registers Wn n: 30001 ~ 40000 N/A Word

NOTE

1) The above addresses of Servo, AC drive, Temperature controller and PLC Module are in hexadecimal

format. PLC Word Device X and Y are in octal format. Other PLC Word Device M, S, T, C, D and HC are

in decimal format.

2) WORD_DEVICE_ X / WORD_DEVICE_Y / WORD_DEVICE_M / WORD_DEVICE_S: Address must be

0 or the multiple of 16.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Servo communication address SERVO-n.b n: 0 ~ 0700h b: 0 ~ f

AC drive communication address INVERTER-n.b n: 0 ~ 2299h b: 0 ~ f

TCntrl communication address TEMP_CTRL-n.b n: 0 ~ 6000h b: 0 ~ f

Servo Digital Input SERVO_DI-n N/A n: 1 ~ 8

Servo Digital Output SERVO_DO-n N/A n: 1 ~ 5

WORD_DEVICE_X PLC_Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)

WORD_DEVICE_Y PLC_Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)

WORD_DEVICE_M PLC_Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 1535

1536 ~ 4095

WORD_DEVICE_S PLC_Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 1023

WORD_DEVICE_T PLC_Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

WORD_DEVICE_C PLC_Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

TCntrl Bit communication address TEMP_CTRLB-n N/A n: 800 ~ 8FFh

Discrete Outputs RWB-n N/A n: 0 ~ FFFFh

Discrete Inputs RB-n N/A n: 0 ~ FFFFh

Discrete Outputs Bn N/A n: 1 ~ 10000

Discrete Inputs Bn N/A n: 10001 ~ 20000

NOTE

1) The above addresses of Servo, AC drive, Temperature controller and PLC Module are in hexadecimal

format.

Page 315: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-9

2) PLC Word Device X and Y are in octal format. Other PLC Word Device M, S, T, C, D and HC are in

decimal format.

3) Servo Digital Input and Servo Digital Output are only for Servo.

Pay close attention to the following important notes:

4) For Delta AC drive:

Communication address for HMI read/write address uses hexadecimal format. For detailed information

about communication address of Delta AC drive, please refer to Delta AC drive “User Manual”.

Example 1: Parameter 9-01 of Delta VFD-S drive Transmission Speed needs to be set to INVERTER901

in HMI. (Decimal 9 is converted to 09 in hexadecimal and 01 is converted to 01 in hexadecimal.

Therefore, setting INVERTER901 to HMI will discard the first 0)

Decimal value

Hexadecimal value

01 (Hexadecimal value)

09 (Hexadecimal value) The communication address of parameter 9-01 is 0901H.

Example 2: if setting of parameter 8-17 (Lower Bound of DC Braking Start-up Frequency) of Delta VFD-

S drive is desired, user needs to set INVERTER811 in HMI. (8 is converted to 08 in hexadecimal and 17

is converted to 11 in hexadecimal. Therefore, setting the INVERTER811 to HMI will discard the first 0)

Decimal value

Hexadecimal value

11 (Hexadecimal value)

08 (Hexadecimal value) The communication address of parameter 8-17 is 0811H.

5) For Delta Servo drive:

HMI Read/Write address setting needs to input the communication address listed in SERVO “User

Manual”.

Servo Digital Input and Servo Digital Output are only for Servo.

6) For Delta Temperature Controller (DTA series):

HMI can be set up to connect to several Delta A series temperature controllers on standard Modbus

networks by using RTU transmission mode. However, the communication delay time may need to

increase. Therefore, 5ms or longer is highly recommended.

Page 316: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-10 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

Delta Servo

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller CN3 cable connector (RS-232)

Controller CN3 cable connector

(RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) TX

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(4) RX

(1) GND

1

2

3 5

4 6 Top View

RS-422

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller CN3 cable connector (RS-422)

Controller CN3 cable connector

(RS-422)

RXD+ (2) (5) TX+

RXD- (1)

TXD+ (3)

(6) TX-

(3) RX+

TXD- (4) (4) RX-

1

2

3 5

4 6 Top View

RS-485

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller CN3 cable connector (RS-485)

Controller CN3 cable connector

(RS-485)

RXD+ (2) (3) 485+

TXD+ (3)

RXD- (1)

(5) 485+

(4) 485-

TXD- (4) (6) 485-

1

2

3 5

4 6 Top View

Page 317: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-11

Delta AC drive

RS-485

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-485)

Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-485)

RXD+ (2) (4 ) SG+

TXD+ (3)

RXD- (1 )

TXD- (4) (3 ) SG-

GND (5) (2 ) GND

Top View

DO NOT use Pin 1, 5 and 6 whileusing RS-485 communication.

61

2: GND3: SG-4: SG+

NOTE

1) When connecting to a Delta VFD-M series AC drive, please connect Pin 5 (GND) of the Delta HMI and

Pin 2 (GND) of the Delta VFD-M AC drive.

Temperature Controller

RS-485

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller RS-485 cable connector

RXD+ (2) D+

TXD+ (3)

RXD- (1)

TXD- (4) D-

Page 318: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-12 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Delta DVP PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, Even, 1.

Controller station number: 1.

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

X_Data Xn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A

Y_Data Yn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A

M_Data Mn n: 0 ~ 1520, 1536 ~ 4080 N/A

S_Data Sn n: 0 ~ 1008 N/A

T_Register Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A

C_Register Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A

D_Register Dn n: 0 ~ 4095, 4096 ~ 9999 N/A

HC_Register Cn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A

NOTE

1) (W) is “Word”.

2) (DW) is “Double Word”.

3) X_Data / Y_Data / M_Data / S_Data: Address must be 0 or the multiple of 16.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

X_Data Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)

Y_Data Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)

M_Data Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 1520, 1536 ~ 4080

S_Data Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 1023

T_Coil Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

C_Coil Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Page 319: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-13

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232 Connection

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (5) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(4) RXD

(8) GND

Top View

RS-485 Connection

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller RS-485 cable connector

RXD+ (2) D+

TXD+ (3)

RXD- (1 )

TXD- (4) D-

1 4 5

8

Page 320: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-14 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

AllenBradley MicroLogix PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory setting

Baud rate: 19200, 8, None, 1.

PLC station number: 1.

Control area/status area: B3:0/B3:10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range

Bit No. Register Type Format

Word No. Low Byte

High Byte File No.

Output File O:n n: 0 ~ 3 N/A 0

Input File I:n n: 0 ~ 3 N/A 1

Status File S2:n n: 0 ~ 65 N/A 2

Bit File B3:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 3

Timer Flag T4:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 4

Timer Preset Value T4:n.PRE n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 4

Timer Accumulator Value T4:n.ACC n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 4

Counter Flag C5:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 5

Counter Preset Value C5:n.PRE n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 5

Counter Accumulator Value C5:n.ACC n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 5

Control File R6:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 6

Control Size of Bit Array R6:n.LEN n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 6

Control Reserved File R6:n.POS n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 6

Integer File N7:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A 7

Bit No : Low byte is not used, so the value is 0. High byte stores file number.

Data Size : Word.

T4, C5 and R6 only read 1 Word once.

If reading multiple Words once, the communication speed of PLC will be slow.

NOTE

1) After last communication data has been memorized by PLC (PLC will send 0x10 0x05 consecutively),

communication may fail. At this time, power off and power up HMI or power off and power up PLC once.

Page 321: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-15

Contacts

Read/Write Range

Bit No.

Low Byte High Byte Contact Type Format

Word No.

Bits File No.

Output O:n/b n: 0 ~ 3 b: 0 ~ 15 0

Input I:n/b n: 0 ~ 3 b: 0 ~ 15 1

Status S2:n/b n: 0 ~ 65 b: 0 ~ 15 2

Bit B3:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 3

Timer T4:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15

T4:n/EN n: 0 ~ 255 15

T4:n/TT n: 0 ~ 255 14

T4:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13

4

Timer Preset Value T4:n.PRE/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 4

Timer Accumulator Value T4:n.ACC/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 4

Counter flag C5:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15

C5:n/CU n: 0 ~ 255 15

C5:n/CD n: 0 ~ 255 14

C5:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13

C5:n/OV n: 0 ~ 255 12

C5:n/UN n: 0 ~ 255 11

C5:n/UA n: 0 ~ 255 10

5

Counter Preset Value C5:n.PRE/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 5

Counter Accumulator Value C5:n.ACC/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 5

Control R6:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15

R6:n/EN n: 0 ~ 255 15

R6:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13

R6:n/ER n: 0 ~ 255 11

R6:n/UL n: 0 ~ 255 10

R6:n/IN n: 0 ~ 255 9

R6:n/FD n: 0 ~ 255 8

6

Control Size of Bit Array R6:n.LEN/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 6

Control Reserved R6:n.POS/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 6

Integer N7:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 7

Bit No : Low byte stores Bit address. High byte stores file number.

Page 322: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-16 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232 Connection

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male

(RS-232)

RXD (2) (7) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(4) RXD

(2) GND

(3) RTS

(6) CTS

Top View

1 4 37

2

6

Page 323: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-17

AllenBradley SLC5 PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory setting

Baud rate: 19200, 8, None, 1.

PLC station number: 1.

Control area/status area: B3:0/B3:10.

NOTE

1) Error Check uses CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check).

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range

Word No. Bit No.

Low Byte High Byte Register Type Format

Element No. Slot or File No.

Output File O:n O:s.n

n: 0 ~ 30 N/A Slot No. s = 0 s: 0 ~ 255 File No. = 0

Input File I:n I:s.n

n: 0 ~ 30 N/A Slot No. s = 0 s: 0 ~ 255 File No. = 1

Status File S2:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A File No. = 2

Bit File Bf:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 3.

Timer Flag Tf:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.

Timer Preset Value Tf:n.PRE n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.

Timer Accumulator Value Tf:n.ACC n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.

Counter Flag Cf:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.

Counter Preset Value Cf:n.PRE n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.

Page 324: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-18 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Read/Write Range

Word No. Bit No.

Low Byte High Byte Register Type Format

Element No. Slot or File No.

Counter Accumulator Value Cf:n.ACC n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.

Control File Rf:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.

Control Size of Bit Array Rf:n.LEN n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.

Control Reserved File Rf:n.POS n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.

Integer File Nf:n n: 0 ~ 255 N/A f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 7.

Bit No : Low byte is not used, so the value is 0. High byte stores file number.

Contacts

Read/Write Range

Word No. Bit No.

Low Byte High Byte Contact Type Format

Element No.Bits Slot or File No.

Output O:n/b O:s.n/b

n: 0 ~ 30 b: 0 ~ 15 Slot No. s = 0 s: 0 ~ 255 File No. = 0

Input I:n/b I:s.n/b

n: 0 ~ 30 b: 0 ~ 15 Slot No. s = 0 s: 0 ~ 255 File No. = 1

Status S2:n/b n: 0 ~ 31 b: 0 ~ 15 2

Bit Bf:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 3.

Timer Tf:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15

Tf:n/EN n: 0 ~ 255 15

Tf:n/TT n: 0 ~ 255 14

Tf:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13

f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.

Timer Preset Value Tf:n.PRE/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.

Page 325: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-19

Read/Write Range

Word No. Bit No.

Low Byte High Byte Contact Type Format

Element No.Bits Slot or File No.

Timer Accumulator Value Tf:n.ACC/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 4.

Counter Flag Cf:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15

Cf:n/CU n: 0 ~ 255 15

Cf:n/CD n: 0 ~ 255 14

Cf:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13

Cf:n/OV n: 0 ~ 255 12

Cf:n/UN n: 0 ~ 255 11

Cf:n/UA n: 0 ~ 255 10

f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.

Counter Preset Value Cf:n.PRE/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.

Counter Accumulator Value Cf:n.ACC/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 5.

Control Rf:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15

Rf:n/EN n: 0 ~ 255 15

Rf:n/DN n: 0 ~ 255 13

Rf:n/ER n: 0 ~ 255 11

Rf:n/UL n: 0 ~ 255 10

Rf:n/IN n: 0 ~ 255 9

Rf:n/FD n: 0 ~ 255 8

f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.

Control Size of Bit Array Rf:n.LEN/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.

Control Reserved Rf:n.POS/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 6.

Integer Nf:n/b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15 f: 10 ~ 255 If f is ignored, file no. will be default setting 7.

Bit No : Low byte stores Bit address. High byte stores file number.

NOTE

1) Device O and I need to assign Slot No. (s). If not assign Slot No., it will use default setting 0.

Page 326: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-20 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB female (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB female

(RS-232)

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) SG

(7) RTS

(8) CTS

Top View

Pin1

Page 327: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-21

Cimon PLC (Loader Protocol) Back to Table

A. HMI factory setting

Baud rate: 38400, 8, None, 1, RS-232.

PLC station number: 1.

Control area/status area: D00000 / D00010.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

Input Xn n: 000-512 N/A Word

Output Yn n: 000-512 N/A Word

General Purpose Relay Mn n: 000-999 N/A Word

General Purpose Relay Ln n: 000-999 N/A Word

Latch Relay Kn n: 000-999 N/A Word

Flags Fn n: 000-127 N/A Word

Timer (Set) TSn n: 0000-4095 N/A Word

Timer (Current) TCn n: 0000-4095 N/A Word

Counter (Set) CSn n: 0000-4095 N/A Word

Counter (Current) CCn n: 0000-4095 N/A Word

General Purpose Word Data Dn n:00000-31999 N/A Word

Step Controller Sn n: 0-99 N/A Byte

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Xnb n: 000-512 b: 0-F

Output Ynb n: 000-512 b: 0-F

General Purpose Relay Mnb n: 000-999 b: 0-F

General Purpose Relay Lnb n: 000-999 b: 0-F

Latch Relay Knb n: 000-999 b: 0-F

Flags Fnb n: 000-127 b: 0-F

Timer Status Tb N/A b: 0-4095

Counter Status Cb N/A b: 0-4095

Page 328: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-22 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 6 pin RJ11

Controller 9 pin D-SUB female

(RS-232)

RXD (2 ) 2

TXD (3 )

GND (5)

3

5

Top View

NOTE

1) Device S

The unit of PLC internal memory is byte and Device S is read by the unit of byte. Therefore, we

recommend the user do not use two consecutive devices S as the read addresses or the interference will

occur. For example, when choosing two numeric input device, please use S24 and S26, do not use S24

and S25.

1 ~ 6

Page 329: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-23

Copley Servo (Stepnet Protocol) Back to Table

A. HMI factory setting

Baud rate: 9600, 8, None, 1.

PLC station number: 0.

Control area/status area: None.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

RAM memory Rn n: 00-FF (Hex) N/A DWord

Flash memory Fn n: 00-FF (Hex) N/A DWord

Internal Register IRn n: 0-31 N/A Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

BIT_DEVICE_RB RBn.b n: 00-FF (Hex) b: 0-31

BIT_DEVICE_FB FBn.b n: 00-FF (Hex) b: 0-31

BIT_DEVICE_T0 T0n N/A n: 0

BIT_DEVICE_T1 T1n N/A n: 0

BIT_DEVICE_T2 T2n N/A n: 0

BIT_DEVICE_RST RSTn N/A n: 0

BIT_DEVICE_CPR CPRn n: 00-FF (Hex) N/A

BIT_DEVICE_CPF CPFn n: 00-FF (Hex) N/A

NOTE

1) RB and FB are the bit access of Ram/Flash memory. Therefore, RB0x21.14 indicates bit 14 of Ram

memory 0x21.

2) T0, T1 and T2 is virtual device for simulating Trajectory Generator Command. The number of 0, 1 and 2

indicates the subcommand of that command, so only bit 0 is acceptable.

3) RST is for simulating Reset Command, so only bit 0 is acceptable.

4) CPR and CPF are for simulating Copy Command of Ram and Flash individually. The address (n) after

CPR and CPF is just the copy address for Ram/Flash memory. For example, CPRCA indicates that the

content of Ram memory 0xCA will be copied into Flash memory 0xCA and CPFA6 indicates that the

content of Flash memory 0xA6 will be copied into Ram memory 0xA6.

5) T0, T1, T2, RST, CPR, CPF are all write-only and they can not be used on Reset button.

Page 330: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-24 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB female (RS-232)

RXD (2 ) RS-232 TxD

TXD (3 )

GND (5)

RS-232 RxD

Signal Ground

Page 331: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-25

Danfoss VLT 2800 (FC Protocol) Back to Table

A. HMI factory setting

Baud rate: 9600, 8, Even, 1, RS-485.

PLC station number: 1.

Control area/status area: None / None.

NOTE

1) Delta HMI can be connected to for VLT-2800, 5000, 6000, 7000 controllers.

2) Each data length format of Danfoss AC drive parameter is not fixed, therefore, “Multiple Duplicate”

function is not provided.

3) Max. supported alarm number is 16. If the alarm number is over 16, a fault will occur.

4) Does not support “optimum read/write” characteristic.

5) If the selected element is a string, the minimum data length should be more than 2.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range

Bit No.

Low Byte High Byte Register Type Format

Word No.

Index No.

Parameter Pn:I n: 0 ~ 999 0 I: 0 ~ 31

Control Word CTRWD 0 N/A N/A

Status Word STAWD 0 N/A N/A

Index No : If the index No. is not used, its default setting will be 0. The default setting of index No. for

parameter P606 ~ P617 is 1.

Please notice that it is necessary to input the index No. when using some parameters of Danfoss

controllers. At this time, please pay close attention on the setting range of index number. If the setting

range is not started from 0, the parameter read & write failure will occur. For example, the index No.

setting range of the parameter P615 is from 1 to 20, if the users do not input the index No., the system

will assume the index number is 0 (default setting) and the a fault will occur when the users read or write

the parameter.

CTRWD: Write-only. (Can not be used on the devices which can display the value or input value. It is

recommended to be used on the setting value/setting constant (button), or marco function.)

STAWD: Read-only.

Control & Status Word: Please refer to the explanation on the next page.

Page 332: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-26 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Contacts

Read/Write Range

Word No. Bit No.

Low Byte High Byte Contact Type Format

Element No.Bits Index No.

Parameter Pn:I.b n: 0 ~ 999 b: 0 ~ 31 I: 0 ~ 31

Bit No : Low byte stores Bit address. High byte stores index number.

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-485

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller RS-485 cable connector

RXD+ (2) 68 TXD/RXD+

TXD+ (3 )

RXD- (1 )

TXD- (4)

Shell Shell

69 TXD/RXD-

Explanation of Control Word & Status Word

Control Word

Bit Bit = 0 Bit = 1

15 No Function Reversing

14 Choice of Setup 2 (msb)

13 Choice of Setup 1 (lsb)

12 No Function Relay 04 activated

11 No Function Relay 01 activated

10 Data Not Vaild Vaild

9 Ramp 1 Ramp2

8 Jog 1 OFF ON

7 No Function Reset

6 Ramp Stop Start

5 Hold Ramp Enable

4 Quick-Stop Ramp

3 Coasting Enable

2 DC Brake Ramp

1 Preset reference choice msb

0 Preset reference choice msb

When Bit 10 = 1 (Data Valid), the Control Word is valid.

Page 333: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-27

Status Word

Bit Bit = 0 Bit = 1

15 Timer OK Above limit

14 Torque OK Above limit

13 Voltage OK Above limit

12 Temperature OK Over-Temp, auto-start pending

11 Not Running Running

10 Out of Range Frequency OK

9 Local Control Bus Control

8 Speed ≠ reference Speed = reference

7 No Warning Warning

6 Reserved

5 Reserved

4 Reserved

3 No Fault Trip

2 Coasting Enabled

1 VLT not ready Ready

0 Control not ready Ready

Page 334: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-28 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Emerson EC20 Series PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory setting

Baud rate: 19200, 8, Even, 1 (RS-232).

PLC station number: 0.

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

Data Word Dn n: 0-7999 N/A Word

Special Data Word SDn n: 0-255 N/A Word

Data Word Zn n: 0-15 N/A Word

Timer Tn n: 0-255 N/A Word

Counter Cn n: 0-199 N/A Word

DoubleWord Counter CDWn n: 200-255 N/A DWord

DoubleWord Data Word DDWn n: 0-7998 N/A DWord

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

External Output Relay Yb N/A b: 0-377(Octal)

External Input Relay Xb N/A b: 0-377(Octal)

Internal Relay Mb N/A b: 0-1999

Special Internal Relay SMb N/A b: 0-255

Status Relay Sb N/A b: 0-991

Timer Tb N/A b: 0-255

Counter Cb N/A b: 0-255

NOTE

PLC Communication Settings:

1) Emerson EC20 series PLC has two communication ports, COM0 and COM1. They are provided for the

communication protocol for connecting to PC, Modbus communication protocol and user-defined

protocol. The default setting is COM0 to be enabled only, so the user needs to set the communication

mode as Modbus RTU via PC software before using it.

2) COM1 supports RS-232 and RS-485.

Page 335: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-29

3) Please note that not all of the addresses can be written when reading SM and SD device. We

recommend the user not to set all of the addresses as write address except when setting parameters.

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller COM1

RXD (2 ) TXD

TXD (3 )

GND (5)

RXD

GND

RS-485

DOP series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller COM1

D- (1)(3) RS485+

D- (4)

D+ (2)(4) RS485-

D+ (3)

G ND (5) GND

Page 336: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-30 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Facon FB Series PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, Even, 1.

Controller Station number: 1.

Control area/status area: R0 / R10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Input Relay WXn n: 0 ~ 9992 N/A Byte

Output Relay WYn n: 0 ~ 9992 N/A Byte

Internal Relay WMn n: 0 ~ 9992 N/A Byte

Step Relay WSn n: 0 ~ 9992 N/A Byte

Data Register Rn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A Word

Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A Word

Timer Present Value RTn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word

Counter Present Value RCn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word

Data Register DRCn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Double Word

Input Relay / Output Relay / Internal Relay / Special Relay: Address must be the multiple of 8.

Contacts

Read/Write range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999

Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999

Internal Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999

Step Relay Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999

Timer Flag Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999

Counter Flag Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999

Page 337: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-31

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 15 pin male (RS-232)

Controller 15 pin male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(1) RXD

(6) SG

(3) RTS

(4) CTS

Top View

RS-232

Connecting to CB (Communication Board) or CM (Communication Module)

FBs Series Port 1

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3) RXD

(5) GND

(8) RTS

(7) CTS

RS-232

FBs Series Port 0

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 4 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)

Controller 4 pin Mini DIN male

(RS-232)

RXD (2) (4) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(1) GND

(3) +5V

Pin1

Pin1

1 2

3 4

Page 338: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-32 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Festo PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, None, 1.

Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol)

Control area/status area: R0 / R10.

NOTE

1) Connectable PLC: FEC-FC Model

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size

WORD_DEVICE_IW Iwn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_OW Own n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_FW FWn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_TW TWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_CW CWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_R Rn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_TP TPn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_CP CPn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

Contacts

Register Type Format Word No. Bit No.

BIT_DEVICE_I In.b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15

BIT_DEVICE_O On.b n: 0 ~ 255 b: 0 ~ 15

BIT_DEVICE_F Fn.b n: 0 ~ 9999 b: 0 ~ 15

BIT_DEVICE_T Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

BIT_DEVICE_C Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

BIT_DEVICE_TON TONn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

BIT_DEVICE_TOFF TOFFn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

BIT_DEVICE_T / BIT_DEVICE_C / BIT_DEVICE_TON / BIT_DEVICE_TOFF: Only 1 Bit can be

transferred for each communication.

Only 1 Bit or 1 Word can be transferred for each write command.

Page 339: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-33

C. Connections

NOTE

1) Communication port of PLC: COM port

2) It needs to use the dedicated cable for FESTO controllers Cable for transferring TTL to RS-232 and it

is 6 pin RJ-12 connector at PLC side.

Page 340: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-34 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

GE Fanuc 90 Series SNP PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 19200, 8, ODD, 1.

Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)

communication is allowed.)

Control area/status area: %R1 / %R10.

NOTE

1) Please notice that no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication

is allowed.

2) If the PLC enabled “Check Password” function, the user needs to set the password by clicking Option >

Configuration > Communication. The user can find Controller Settings and set PLC password on

Communication Tab in the Configuration dialog box. Please enter a 4-digit password (If entering a

password that exceeds 4-digit number, only the first 4-digit number is valid).

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Discrete Inputs %In n: 1 ~ 12288 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)

Discrete Outputs %Qn n: 1 ~ 12288 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)

Discrete Temporaries %Tn n: 1 ~ 256 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)

Discrete Internals %Mn n: 1 ~ 12288 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)

%SA Discretes %SAn n: 1 ~ 128 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)

%SB Discretes %SBn n: 1 ~ 128 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)

%SC Discretes %SCn n: 1 ~ 128 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)

%S Discretes %S-n n: 1 ~ 128 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)

Genius Global Data %Gn n: 1 ~ 7680 N/A Word (the multiple of 16 + 1)

Registers %Rn n: 1 ~ 16384 N/A Word

Analog Inputs %AIn n: 1 ~ 8192 N/A Word

Analog Outputs %AQn n: 1 ~ 8192 N/A Word

Page 341: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-35

Contacts

Read/Write range Contact Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Discrete Inputs %In N/A n: 1 ~ 12288

Discrete Outputs %Qn N/A n: 1 ~ 12288

Discrete Temporaries %Tn N/A n: 1 ~ 256

Discrete Internals %Mn N/A n: 1 ~ 12288

%SA Discretes %SAn N/A n: 1 ~ 128

%SB Discretes %SBn N/A n: 1 ~ 128

%SC Discretes %SCn N/A n: 1 ~ 128

%S Discretes %-Sn N/A n: 1 ~ 128

Genius Global Data %Gn N/A n: 1 ~ 7680

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-232)

Controller RJ-45 cable connector

(RS-232)

Controller RJ-45 cable connector

(RS-232)

RXD (2) (5) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(6) RXD

(4) GND Top View81

RS-422

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 15 pin male (RS-232)

Controller 15 pin male (RS-232)

RXD+ (2) (13) SD(B')

TXD+ (3)

TXD- (4)

(11) RD(B)

(10 ) RD(A)

(6) RTS(A)

(15 ) CTS(A')

RXD- (1) (12 ) SD(A')

(8) CTS(B)

(14 ) RTS(B')

(9) RD( *)(NOT E 1 )

Top View

NOTE

1) (9) RD(*) should be connected to 10(RD)(A) in serial. But if connecting PLC model is Series 90-70 PLC

IC697CPU731 and IC697CPU771, (9) RD(*) needs to be connected to 11(RD)(B).

Pin1

Page 342: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-36 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Hitachi EH Series PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 19200, 7, EVEN, 1.

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: WR0 / WR10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

External Input WX WXrusn Word

External Output WY WYrusn s: 0-A n: 0-7

r: 0-4 u: 0-4 N/A

Word

Internal Output WR WRn n: 0-C3FF N/A Word

Special Internal Output WR WRn n: F000-F1FF N/A Word

Shared Internal Output WM WMn n: 0-3FF N/A Word

CPU Link Area 1 WL WLn n: 0-3FF N/A Word

CPU Link Area 2 WL WLn n: 1000-13FF N/A Word

Timer/Counter TC TCn n: 0-511 N/A Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

External Input X Xrusb

External Output Y Yrusb s: 0-A N/A

r: 0-4 u: 0-4 b: 0-95

Internal Output R Rb N/A b: 0-7FF

Shared Internal Output M Mnb n: 0-3FF b: 0-F

CPU Link Area 1 L Lnb n: 0-3FF b: 0-F

CPU Link Area 2 L Lnb n: 1000-13FF b: 0-F

On Delay Timer TD TDb N/A b: 0-255

Single-shot Timer SS SSb N/A b: 0-255

Up Counter CU CUb N/A b: 0-511

Up-down Counter up input CTU CTUb N/A b: 0-511

Up-down Counter down input CTD CTDb N/A b: 0-511

Up-down Counter down output CT CTb N/A b: 0-511

Progress Value Clear CL CLb N/A b: 0-511

Rising Edge Detection DIF DIFb N/A b: 0-511

Falling Edge Detection DFN DFNb N/A b: 0-511

Page 343: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-37

NOTE

1) Communication Settings:

In Hitachi EH series PLC, only port 1 can be used for communication through procedure 2. The

user can select procedure type via DIP switch and specific Special Internal Input (WR).

In Hitachi EH-150 series PLC, only EH-CPU***A/448/516/548 can use procedure 2.

It needs to set the external I/O (WX, WY, X, Y) of EH series PLC first or HMI cannot read and write

their addresses.

Hitachi EH series PLC and PC can be connected only by procedure 1 (@19200bps)

2) CPU Relevant Notice:

EH-150

DIP5 should be set to ON.

If DIP5 is set to ON, PLC will determine the proper procedure (1 or 2) by the value of WRf037.

When setting the address, the highest bit of write value must be 1 and then PLC can write the value

into other seven bits. The data will not lost even when the power of PLC is cut off. Therefore,

i) Write the value 0x8000 into the address. After restart PLC, the address value will become

0x0000 and perform communication by procedure 1.

ii) Write the value 0xC000 into the address. After restart PLC, the address value will become

0x4000 and perform communication by procedure 2.

Use DIP3 and DIP4 to set the communication speed of port 1.

i) When DIP3 is ON and DIP4 is OFF, the communication speed is 19200bps.

Use DIP6, PHL to set the communication speed of port 2.

i) When DIP6 is ON and PHL is OFF, the communication speed is 19200bps.

ii) The EH-150 PLC is a “Base Unit” which has a built-in CPU module. This unit allows easy

connection of extension module, such as “External I/O”.

MicroEH

DIP5 is used to set communication speed.

i) When SW1 is ON, the communication speed is 19200bps.

MicroEH PLC will determine the proper procedure (1 or 2) by the value of WRf01a. Different than

EH-150, when setting the address, the highest bit of write value does not need to be 1. But the data

will lost even the power of PLC is cut off. However, if set the value of R7f6 to 1, the data of WRf01a

will be saved into Flash memory.

i) 0x0000 for procedure 1.

ii) 0x8000 for procedure 2.

iii) If the PLC uses procedure 2 and saves the data into Flash memory, it cannot connect to

the peripheral devices and programs (Ladder Editor) that only support procedure 1.

iv) Standard External I/O built in MicroEH PLC are listed as below:

Digital Type

Page 344: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-38 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

slot 0: X48

slot 1: Y32

slot 2: empty16

Analog Type

slot 3: X4W

slot 4: Y4W

3) Communication Protocol:

External I/O (X, Y, WX, WY)

Address rules:[r][u][s][n/b].

i) Word no/Bit no [n/b]

ii) Slot number [s]

iii) Unit number [u]

iv) Remote number [r]

Only support EH-150

v) ex1: WX103 represents unit 1, word 3 of slot 0

vi) ex2: X103 represents bit 3 of slot 1

vii) ex3: X113 represents bit 13 of slot 1

viii) ex4: Y2004 represents unit 2, bit 4 of slot 0

ix) ex5: Y2104 represents unit 2, bit 4 of slot 1

External I/O (X, Y, WX, WY) cannot read and write several addresses one time so they do not

support “optimum read/write” characteristic.

Internal Output

Shared Internal Output (M, WM) read and write the same address. For example,

i) M3ab and WM3a: the read and write address of M3ab is the bit b of WM3a.

CPU Link Area (L, WL) are the same as Shared Internal Output (M, WM). CPU Link Area (L, WL)

also read and write the same address.

i) Only support EH-150.

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (5) SD1

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(6) RD1

(1) SG1

RTS (7) (7) DR1

CT S (8 ) (8 ) RS1

Top View

Pin1

Page 345: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-39

HUST CNC Controller Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 2.

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: W0 / W10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

Word Register Wn n: 0 ~ 13500 N/A Word

Double Word Register Dn n: 0 ~ 13500 N/A Double Word

NOTE

1) The unit for Hust CNC controller is D Word and Wn is the low word of Dn.

Contacts

Read/Write range Contact Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

BIT_DEVICE_B Bm.n m: 0 ~ 13500 n: 0 ~ 31

BIT_DEVICE_I In N/A n: 0 ~ 255 (8 DW)

BIT_DEVICE_O On N/A n: 0 ~ 255 (8 DW)

BIT_DEVICE_C Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255 (8 DW)

BIT_DEVICE_S Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 255 (8 DW)

BIT_DEVICE_A An N/A n: 0 ~ 1023 (32 DW)

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3) RXD

(5) SG

(8) RTS

(7) CTS

Top View

Pin1

Page 346: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-40 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Jetter Nano Series PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, EVEN, 1 (RS-232).

Controller station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)

communication is allowed.)

Control area/status area: WR0 / WR10.

NOTE

1) Please notice that no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication

is allowed.

2) Only 1 Bit or 1 Word can be transferred for each communication.

3) In general, each register occupies max. 24 Bits. However, some registers occupies 8 Bits only.

4) Because the initial time of this controller is longer, it is recommended to set HMI startup delay time

(Recommended time is 10 seconds).

5) When the register R is used for Double Word device, please set its format as signed format. (The default

format in Screen Editor is signed format)

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data

Length

16 Bits Register WRn n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A 16 Bits

32 Bits Register Rn n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A 24 Bits

Only the first 16 bits are used for WRn registers.

Only the first 24 bits are used for Rn registers, the highest 8 bits (Bit 24 ~ 31) are set to 0 by default setting.

(24-bit Integer : If in decimal format, the range is -8388608 ~ +8388607. If in hexadecimal format, the range

is 0x000000 ~ 0xFFFFFF.)

NOTE

1) The difference between WRn and Rn:

When using devices that the data length is in Word, only Bit 0 ~ 15 are valid for both of WRn and

Rn registers.

When using devices that the data length is in Double Word,

if the read/write address format is set to WRn, the Bit 0 ~ 15 of WRn register is the low word of a

read/write value, the Bit 0 ~ 15 of WRn+1 register is the high word of a read/write value.

Page 347: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-41

if the read/write address format is set to Rn, only Bit 0 ~ 23 are valid for Rn registers.

(Notice: As the Jetter controller is a 24-bit format controller, the valid setting range is 24 Bits.

If exceeds this range, HMI will stop read/write operation and show “…..Value is Incorrect”

on the screen. So, please do not set any bit on Bit24 ~ Bit31 (Bit24 ~ Bit31 cannot be written).

When using devices that the data length is in m Words,

if the read/write address format is set to WRn, the Bit 0 ~ 15 of WRn register is the lowest word of a

read/write value and the Bit 0 ~ 15 of WRn+m-1 register is the highest word of a read/write value.

if the read/write address format is set to Rn, the Bit 0 ~ 23 of Rn register is the lowest word of a

read/write value and the Bit 0 ~ 23 of Rn+1 register is the highest word of a read/write value.

Each register is regards as a “Double Word”. The value of Bit24 ~ Bit31 is 0.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Relay Inbb n: 1 ~ 32 bb: 01 ~ 08

Output Relay Onbb n: 1 ~ 32 bb: 01 ~ 08

Flag Relay Fn N/A n: 0 ~ 32767

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3) RXD

(7) GND

Top View

The pin definition of the cable of Jetter controller is different than the general RS-232 cable. Please pay

close attention.

Pin1

Page 348: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-42 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Jetter JC Series PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, EVEN, 1 (RS-232).

Controller station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)

communication is allowed.)

Control area/status area: WR0 / WR10.

NOTE

1) Please notice that no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication

is allowed.

2) Only 1 Bit or 1 Word / 2 Words can be transferred for each read and write command.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data

Length

16 Bits Register WRn n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A 16 Bits

32 Bits Register Rn n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A 24 Bits

The characteristics of WRn and Rn of JC series are the same as the Nano series. Please refer to the section

that introduces Jetter Nano Series PLC.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Relay Inbb n: 1 ~ 32 bb: 01 ~ 16

Output Relay Onbb n: 1 ~ 32 bb: 01 ~ 16

Flag Relay Fn N/A n: 0 ~ 32767

Page 349: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-43

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (8) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(4) RXD

(2) GND

Top View

2 4

8

Page 350: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-44 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Keyence KV/KZ Series Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, EVEN, 1 (RS-232).

Controller station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)

communication is allowed.)

Control area/status area: DM-0 / DM-10.

NOTE

1) Please notice that no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication

is allowed.

2) Only 1 Bit or 1 Word can be transferred for each communication. (Communication speed is slow.)

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

Timer T-nnn nnn: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word

Counter C-nnn nnn: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word

High-speed Counter CTH-n n: 0 ~ 1 N/A Word

High-speed Counter Comparator CTC-n n: 0 ~ 3 N/A Word

Data Memory DM-nnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 1999 N/A Word

Temporary Data Memory TM-nn nn: 0 ~ 31 N/A Word

Timer Preset Value PT-nnn nnn: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word

Counter Preset Value PC-nnn nnn: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word

CTC Preset Value PCTC-n n: 0 ~ 3 N/A Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Relay R-nnnbb nnn: 0 ~ 69 bb: 00 ~ 15

Timer T-nnn N/A nnn: 0 ~ 199

Counter C-nnn N/A nnn: 0 ~ 199

High-speed counter comparator

CTC-n N/A n: 0 ~ 3

Page 351: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-45

NOTE

When using the protocol format of KV series and connecting to KZ-80T PLC, some errors occur. Please refer

to the following description:

1) Readable Timer address is not continuous. For example, T-0 ~ T-9 can be read, T10 cannot be read,

T11 ~ T20 can be read, T21 ~ T50 cannot be read, …etc.

2) Counter cannot be read. For example,

Registers: C- (Counter), CTH- (High-speed counter), CTC- (High-speed counter comparator),

PC- (Counter preset value), PCTC- (CTC preset value) they all cannot be read.

Contacts: C- (Counter), CTC- (High-speed counter comparator) they all cannot be read also.

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

KV Series

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)

Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)

RXD (2) (3) SD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(5) RD

(4) SG

Top View6 - 1

PLC side (Comm. Port)

KZ Series

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)

Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)

RXD (2) (5) SD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3) RD

(4) SG

Top View6 - 1

PLC side (Comm. Port)

Page 352: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-46 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

NOTE

1) Communication Cable: The pins of SD and RD of KZ-80T and KV Series are reverse.

Page 353: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-47

Koyo SU/DL Series Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1 (RS-232).

Controller station number: 1.

Control area/status area: V1400 / V1410.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data

Length

Timer Accumulated Vn n: 0 ~ 177 (octal) N/A Word

Counter Accumulated Vn n: 1000 ~ 1177 (octal) N/A Word

V Memory Vn n: 1400 ~ 7777 (octal) N/A Word

Linker Relays Vn n: 40000 ~ 40037 (octal) N/A Word

Input Status Vn n: 40400 ~ 40423 (octal) N/A Word

Output Status Vn n: 40500 ~ 40523 (octal) N/A Word

Control Relays Vn n: 40600 ~ 40635 (octal) N/A Word

Stage Vn n: 41000 ~ 41027 (octal) N/A Word

Timer Status Vn n: 41100 ~ 41107 (octal) N/A Word

Counter Status Vn n: 41140 ~ 41147 (octal) N/A Word

Spec. Relay 1 Vn n: 41200 ~ 41205 (octal) N/A Word

Spec. Relay 2 Vn n: 41216 ~ 41230 (octal) N/A Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Linker Relays GXn N/A n: 0 ~ 777 (octal)

Input Status Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 477 (octal)

Output Status Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 477 (octal)

Control Relays Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 737 (octal)

Stage Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 577 (octal)

Timer Status Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 177 (octal)

Counter Status CTn N/A n: 0 ~ 177 (octal)

Spec. Relay 1 SPn N/A n: 0 ~ 137 (octal)

Spec. Relay 2 SPn N/A n: 320 ~ 617 (octal)

Page 354: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-48 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)

Controller RJ-11 cable connector

(RS-232)

RXD(2)

TXD(3)

GND(5)

(4)TXD

(3)RXD

(1)GND

(6)GND

Top View1 - 6

Page 355: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-49

Koyo K-Sequence Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1 (RS-232).

Controller station number: 1.

Control area/status area: R1400 / R1420.

NOTE

1) If read / write address exceeds the valid range, HMI will stop read/write operation and show “….Error

6….. Command Can Not be Executed….” on the screen.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data

Length

Input Status Xnnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 1760 (octal) N/A Word

Output Status Ynnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 1760 (octal) N/A Word

Link Relays GXnnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 3760 (octal) N/A Word

Relays GQnnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 3760 (octal) N/A Word

Relays Mnnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 3760 (octal) N/A Word

Stage Snnnn nnnn: 0 ~ 1760 (octal) N/A Word

Timer Status Tnnn nnn: 0 ~ 360 (octal) N/A Word

Control Relays Cnnn nnn: 0 ~ 360 (octal) N/A Word

Special Relay 1 SPnnn nnn: 0 ~ 760 (octal) N/A Word

Register Rnnnnn nnnnn: 0 ~ 41237 (octal) N/A Word

Register Pnnnnn nnnnn: 0 ~ 37777 (octal) N/A Word

nnnn: Is in octal format and must be the multiple of 16 except for R and P.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Status Xnnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 1777 (octal)

Output Status Ynnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 1777 (octal)

Linker Relays GXnnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 3777 (octal)

Relays GQnnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 3777 (octal)

Control Relays Mnnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 3777 (octal)

Stage Snnnn N/A nnnn: 0 ~ 1777 (octal)

Timer Status Tnnn N/A nnn: 0 ~ 377 (octal)

Page 356: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-50 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Counter Status Cnnn N/A nnn: 0 ~ 377 (octal)

Spec. Relay 1 SPnnn N/A nnn: 0 ~ 777 (octal)

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

Port 0 Communication Cable

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller RJ-11 cable connector (RS-232)

Controller RJ-11 cable connector

(RS-232)

RXD(2)

TXD(3)

GND(5)

(4 )TXD

(3 )RXD

(1 )GND

(6 )GND (Note 1)

Top View1 - 6

If pin 6 is not grounded, a communication error may occur when connecting to a CKD SM 24R controller.

Ensure that pin 6 is well grounded. This will not cause any problems when connecting to SN32DRA

controller.

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) SG

Top View

RS-485

Port 1 Communication Cable

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

D- (1) D-

D+ (2)

D+ (3)

D+

D- (4)

Pin1

Page 357: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-51

The corresponding registers of CCM2 and K-Sequence

Address Corresponding Relationship:

CCM2 K sequence SN32DRA V R R X X I Y Y Q C M M S S S T T T

CT C C SP SP SP

Page 358: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-52 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Lenze LECOM-A/B Protocol Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1 (Baudrate: 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200).

Controller station number: 1 (1~99).

Control area/status area: None / None.

NOTE

1) Please pay close attention to each pin definition of cable connectors.

2) Ensure not to use the general RS-232 5-pin cable. This is because if pin 2, 3, 5, 7, 8 are all connected to

the drive, the drive can not recognize the communication signal and can not identify what kind of

communication it is.

3) For more detailed information of pin definition of cable connectors, please refer to the C. Connections

(Connector Pinouts) of Lenze LECOM-A/B Protocol controller.

4) Ensure the HMI communication data format (The communication data written into the drive) is correct.

The Word “m” in the following table is used to specify the HMI communication data format.

5) Ensure the HMI display data format (Property table/Setting value...etc.) is correct.

6) When using broadcast function, please check if device is available. This is because the broadcast

function can be activated only when the user chooses “write only” device for broadcast station number

(only choose setting value/setting constant (button) and then the broadcast function can be used). If

choosing other devices, the system will ask you to read back the drive setting value, so please ensure to

choose the correct device. If choosing the incorrect devices, a “Controller Station Number Error…” fault

message will display on HMI screen.

7) Support 82XX frequency inverters and 93XX servo inverters.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers (n, m, y are in decimal)

Read/Write Range

Word No. Bit No.

LowByte HighByte Register Type Format

subcode

Data Length

CWn n: 1 ~ 10000 N/A N/A Word Parameter without subcode

CWn.m n: 1 ~ 10000 m: 0 ~ 23 N/A Word

Parameter with subcode CWn/y n: 1 ~ 10000 N/A y:1 ~ 255 Word

CWn/y.m n: 1 ~ 10000 m: 0 ~ 23 y:1 ~ 255 Word

Page 359: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-53

Read/Write Range

Word No. Bit No.

LowByte HighByte Register Type Format

subcode

Data Length

CDn n: 1 ~ 10000 N/A N/A DoubleWord Parameter without subcode

CDn.m n: 1 ~ 10000 m: 0 ~ 23 N/A DoubleWord

Parameter with subcode CDn/y n: 1 ~ 10000 N/A y:1 ~ 255 DoubleWord

CDn/y.m n: 1 ~ 10000 m: 0 ~ 23 y:1 ~ 255 DoubleWord

NOTE

1) m : HMI communication data format

2) The value of m represents the different communication data format:

If m value is undefined: ASCII hexadecimal format (VH). (4 or 8 numbers.)

m >= 23 : ASCII hexadecimal format (VH). (4 or 8 numbers.)

m = 0 ~10 : unsigned, ASCII decimal format (VD).

m represents decimal place, For example:

m=0 no decimal place

m=1 one decimal place (tenth)

m=2 two decimal place (hundredth)

m = 11 ~20 : signed, ASCII decimal format (VD).

m represents decimal place, For example:

m=11 one decimal place (tenth)

m=12 two decimal place (hundredth)

m = 21 : signed, ASCII decimal format (VD).

without decimal place

m = 22 : ASCII hexadecimal format (VH). 2 numbers.

when using this format, the write value will be limited within the range of 0~0xFF (low byte).

For example: when entering 0x1234 during communication, the actual write value is 0x34, not 0x1234.

Contacts (n, b, y are in decimal)

Read/Write Range

Word No. Bit No.

LowByte HighByte Register Type Format

subcode

Parameter without subcode CBn.b n: 1 ~ 10000 b: 0 ~ 31 N/A

Parameter with subcode CBn/y.b n: 1 ~ 10000 b: 0 ~ 31 1 ~ 255

Page 360: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-54 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Only VH type parameter can provide Bit read/write function (it is convenient for the user to read/write Bit No.

of parameters).

CBn.b, CWn (CWn.m), CDn (CDn.m): read/write address is the same (address n).

NOTE

1) Since the data format of this controller is complicated (a. VS (String format), b. VO (Octet string format

data blocks), c. VH (ASCII hexadecimal format)(1, 2, 4 bytes), d. VD (ASCII decimal format)(positive,

negative, decimal,..)) and the communication format is not compatible, therefore, it is needed to ensure

the HMI communication data format is correct, or an error may occur.

2) Registers: only can read/write the data of ASCII hexadecimal format (VH), ASCII decimal format (VD)

(i.e. Either VH or VD data format can be set via communication.)

Contacts: only can read/write the data of ASCII hexadecimal format (VH)

HMI display data format (Property table/Setting value...etc.) should also be correct.

Explanation:

Registers: only can read/write the data of VH, VD. HMI needs to set communication data format

(please refer to 4), 5) and 6)). String format (VS), and Octet string format for data blocks (VO) can

not be used. If the controller returns the data in VS or VO format, HMI will show “……Value Is

Incorrect” on the screen.

Contacts: only can read/write the data of ASCII hexadecimal format (VH). Only VH type parameter

can provide Bit read/write function. If the controller returns the data in other format, HMI will show

“……Value Is Incorrect” on the screen.

Do not write the inexistent Bit address, or HMI will show “….Write …. Command Can Not be

Executed” on the screen.

For example: CW470/1. The valid value of CW470/1 is within the range of 0 ~ 0xFF. Therefore, Bit

8 ~31 is not existed. Although HMI will show the value of Bit 8 ~31 is 0, the user can not write or set

the value.

The settings of ASCII hexadecimal format (VH) and ASCII decimal format (VD) should be correct. If

the VD data is set in VH format in HMI (m value is undefined, or m=22 or 23) or the VH data is set

in VD format in HMI (m=0 ~ 21), when HMI write the data, HMI will show “….Write …. Command

Can Not be Executed” on the screen or tell the user the write value is incorrect.

The decimal place of ASCII decimal format (VD) should be set correctly, or the write value will not

be correct. The decimal place displayed on HMI should also be correct, or the display value will be

incorrect.

ASCII hexadecimal format (VH), 2 numbers (m = 22). The value is limited to 2 numbers. Using this

format the write value will be limited within the range of 0 ~ 0xFF (low byte) automatically.

3) Station Number and Broadcast

The valid station number is from 0 to 99. If exceeds this range, HMI will stop read/write operation

and show “Controller Station Number Error …”on the screen.

Page 361: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-55

00 indicates the global broadcasting number (1~99).

10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 are local broadcasting number.

The affected ranges are: 11~19, 21~29, 31~39, 41~49, 51~59, 61~69, 71~79, 81~89 and 91~99

respectively. Only choose setting value/setting constant (button), and then the broadcast function

can be used. If choosing other devices, the system will be confused while reading back the drive

setting value via broadcast function, so please ensure to choose the correct device. If choosing the

incorrect devices, a “Controller Station Number Error…” fault message will display on HMI screen.

Use in LECOM-A/B protocol. 82XX frequency AC drives and 93XX servo drives all use this protocol.

4) Explanation of communication error address

Registers: display CW n, CWy n, CD n, CDy n in order

Contacts: display CB n, CByn in order (n: address value)

5) HMI data format explanation

Some controller parameters are in Word and some are in Double Word. Therefore, there are two

kinds of data format: Word ( CWn (CWn.m), CWn/y(CWn/y.m) ) and Double Word ( CDn (CDn.m),

CDn/y(CDn/y.m) ).

Furthermore, regarding to Bit No., HMI only read/write 32Bit (Bit0 ~ Bit31) of parameters in VH

format.

CWn(CWn.m), CDn(CDn.m), or CBn.b: read/write address is the same (address n), but

When symbol is set to CW, read/write value is the low word of parameters (n) only,

When symbol is set to CD, read/write value is the Double Word of whole parameters (n),

When symbol is set to CB, read/write value is the Bit (b) No. of parameters (n).

(m : HMI communication data format)

(CWn/y(CWn/y.m), CDn/y(CDn/y.m), CBn/y.b: read/write address, which y subcode is the

same(address n), but

When symbol is set to CW, read/write value is the low word of parameters (n) only,

When symbol is set to CD, read/write value is the Double Word of whole parameters (n),

When symbol is set to CB, read/write value is the Bit (b) No. of parameters (n).

(m : HMI communication data format)

Actually when using HMI,

i) When using devices that the unit is in Word (e.g. numeric devices (numeric value display,

numeric value input…)…), the read/write value will be the same no matter the read/write

address format is set to CWn or CDn as read/write value is the low word of parameters (n)

only.

ii) When using devices that the unit is in Double Word (e.g. numeric devices (numeric value

display, numeric value input…)…), if the read/write address format is set to CWn,

read/write value is coming from the low word of CWn and CWn+1 these two addresses.

(The low word of CWn is regarded as “low word” and the low word of CWn+1 is regarded

as “high word”, and then combining “low word” and “high word” to a Double Word.)

Page 362: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-56 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

If the read/write address format is set to CDn, read/write value is the whole Double Word

of CDn (1 address).

iii) When using character device (e.g. character display, character input…), if the read/write

address format is set to CWn, the read/write value is coming from the low word of CWn,

CWn+1, CWn+2, …every address.

If the read/write address format is set to CDn, read/write value is the whole Double Word

of CDn, CDn+1, CDn+2,…every address.

iv) When using “Multiple Duplicate” function, if the Word and Bit addresses exceed the valid

range, the Word and Bit addresses will be set to 0 automatically. Sometime error will

occur to remind the user when compiling.

v) CBn.b, CBn/y.b are added for the user to read and write Bit No. of parameters in VH

format more easily.

vi) Only can read or write 1 parameter for each communication.

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

Pin 2, 3, 5 are for RS-232 communication. Pin 7, 8 are for RS-485 communication.

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-232)

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) GND

Top View

RS-485

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-485)

D- (1) (7) T/R (A)

D+ (2)

D+ (3)

(8) T/R (B)

D- (4)

Top View

Pin1

Pin1

Page 363: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-57

LG Master K120S/200S Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 38400, 8, None, 1. (RS-232)

Controller station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)

communication is allowed.)

Control area/status area: DW0 / DW10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size

WORD_DEVICE_PW PWn n: 0 ~ 15 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_MW MWn n: 0 ~ 191 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_KW KWn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_LW LWn n: 0 ~ 63 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_FW FWn n: 0 ~ 63 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_TW TWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_CW CWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_DW DWn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word

Contacts

Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.

BIT_DEVICE_P Pnb n: 0 ~ 15 b: 0 ~ f

BIT_DEVICE_M Mnb n: 0 ~ 191 b: 0 ~ f

BIT_DEVICE_K Knb n: 0 ~ 31 b: 0 ~ f

BIT_DEVICE_L Lnb n: 0 ~ 63 b: 0 ~ f

BIT_DEVICE_F Fnb n: 0 ~ 63 b: 0 ~ f

BIT_DEVICE_T Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

BIT_DEVICE_C Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

Page 364: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-58 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232 for LG K120S/200S)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male(RS-232 for LG K120S/200S)

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) GND

Top View

NOTE

1) If connecting to Pin 4 (RXD), Pin 7 (TXD) and Pin5 (SG), it indicates that CNet protocol is used (Please

refer to the section “LG Master-K CNET”. 120S/200S protocol and CNet protocol cannot be used

simultaneously. The users only can select either 120S/200S protocol or CNet protocol.

Pin1

Page 365: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-59

LG Glofa GM6 CNET Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 19200, 8, None, 1. (RS-232)

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: %MW0 / %MW10.

NOTE

1) HMI default setting is predefined for CPU Port. If the user want to connect to CNET communication

module, the baud rate should be changed to 38400, 8, None, 1. (RS-422 / RS-485).

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size

Input Image IWb.s.w w(word):0 ~ 3 s(slot): 0 ~ 7

b(base): 0 ~ 1 Word

Input Image IDb.s.w w(word):0 ~ 1 s(slot): 0 ~ 7

b(base): 0 ~ 1 DWord

Output Image QWb.s.w w(word):0 ~ 3 s(slot): 0 ~ 7

b(base): 0 ~ 1 Word

Output Image QDb.s.w w(word):0 ~ 1 s(slot): 0 ~ 7

b(base): 0 ~ 1 DWord

Internal Memory MWn n: 0 ~ 4095 N/A Word

Internal Memory MDn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A DWord

Contacts

Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.

Input Image IXb.s.n s(slot): 0 ~ 7 n(bit): 0 ~ 63 b(base): 0 ~ 1

Output Image QXb.s.n s(slot): 0 ~ 7 n(bit): 0 ~ 63 b(base): 0 ~ 1

Internal Memory MXn N/A n: 0 ~ 65535

Page 366: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-60 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

via CPU Port

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (7) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(4) RXD

(5) GND

Top View

RS-422

via G6L-CUEC CNET communication module

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller Cable Connector (RS-422)

RXD+ (2) SDA

RXD- (1)

TXD- (4)

SDB

RDB

TXD+ (3) RDA

GND (5) SG

Pin1

Page 367: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-61

LG Master-K CNET Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 38400, 8, None, 1. (RS-422)

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: DW0 / DW10.

NOTE

1) HMI default setting is predefined for G6L-CUEC CNET communication module.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size

I/O Relay PWn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Word

Auxiliary Relay MWn n: 0 ~ 191 N/A Word

Keep Relay KWn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Word

Link Relay LWn n: 0 ~ 63 N/A Word

Special Relay FWn n: 0 ~ 63 N/A Word (Read Only)

Timer Elapsed Value TWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

Counter Elapsed Value CWn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

Data Register DWn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word

Contacts

Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.

I/O Relay PXnb n: 0 ~ 31 b: 0 ~ F

Auxiliary Relay MXnb n: 0 ~ 191 b: 0 ~ F

Keep Relay KXnb n: 0 ~ 31 b: 0 ~ F

Link Relay LXnb n: 0 ~ 63 b: 0 ~ F

Special Relay FXnb n: 0 ~ 63 b: 0 ~ F

Timer Contact Relay TXb N/A b: 0 ~ 255

Counter Contact Relay CXb N/A b: 0 ~ 255

Page 368: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-62 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-422

via G6L-CUEC CNET communication module

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller Cable Connector (RS-422)

RXD+ (2) SDA

RXD- (1)

TXD- (4)

SDB

RDB

TXD+ (3) RDA

GND (5) SG

RS-232

via LG-120S PLC (Master K)

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (7) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(4) RXD

(5) GND

Top View

Pin1

Page 369: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-63

LG XGT CNET Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, None, 1.

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: DW0 / DW10.

NOTE

1) HMI default setting is predefined for XGL-CH2A CNET communication module.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size

I/O Relay PWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word

Auxiliary Relay MWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word

Keep Relay KWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word

Link Relay LWn n: 0 ~ 11263 N/A Word

Special Relay FWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (Read Only)

Timer Elapsed Value TWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word

Counter Elapsed Value CWn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word

Data Register DWn n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A Word

Contacts

Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.

I/O Relay PXnb n: 0 ~ 2047 b: 0 ~ F

Auxiliary Relay MXnb n: 0 ~ 2047 b: 0 ~ F

Keep Relay KXnb n: 0 ~ 2047 b: 0 ~ F

Link Relay LXnb n: 0 ~ 11263 b: 0 ~ F

Special Relay FXnb n: 0 ~ 2047 b: 0 ~ F

Timer Contact Relay TXb N/A b: 0 ~ 2047

Counter Contact Relay CXb N/A b: 0 ~ 2047

Data Relay DXn.b n: 0 ~ 32767 b: 0 ~ F

Page 370: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-64 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-422

via XGL-CH2A CNET communication module (Channel 2)

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller Cable Connector (RS-422)

RXD+ (2) TX+

RXD- ( 1)

TXD- (4)

TX-

RX-

TXD+ (3) RX+

G ND (5) SG

RS-232

via XGL-CH2A CNET communication module (Channel 1)

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (3) TXD

T XD (3)

G ND (5)

(2 ) RXD

(5 ) GND

Top View

Pin1

Page 371: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-65

LIYAN LYPLC EX Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 3064 N/A Byte

Special Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 8000 ~ 8248 N/A Byte

Status Relay Sn n: 0 ~ 992 N/A Byte

Input Relay Xn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Byte

Output Relay Yn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Byte

Timer PV Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

16-bit Counter PV Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word

32-bit Counter PV Cn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Double Word

Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 7999 N/A Word

Special Data Register Dn n: 8000 ~ 8255 N/A Word

Auxiliary Relay / Special Auxiliary Relay / Status Relay / Input Relay / Output Relay: Address must be the

multiple of 8.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 3071

Special Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 8000 ~ 8255

Status Relay Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 999

Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)

Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)

Timer Flag Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Counter Flag Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Page 372: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-66 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(7) RXD

(3) GND

(6) GND

Top View

2 3

6 7

Page 373: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-67

M2i Master Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 38400, 8, None, 1.

Controller station number: 1.

Control area/status area: SB0 / SB10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Word Address SBn n: 0000 ~ FFFF N/A Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Bit Address SBn.b n: 0000 ~ FFFF b: 0 ~ F

Page 374: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-68 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

M2i Slave Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 38400, 8, None, 1.

Controller station number: 1 (no function)

Control area/status area: SB0 / SB10.

NOTE

1) HMI station number is Slave station number. (default setting is 0)

2) The relation between M2i communication address and HMI internal registers.

Modbus address Data definition in HMI

SB0000 ~ SB7FFF $0 ~ $32767

SB8000 ~ SB83FF $M0 ~ $M1023

SB8400 RCPNO

SB8500 ~ SBFFFF RCP0 ~ RCP31487

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size

Word Address SBn n: 0000 ~ FFFF N/A Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Bit Address SBn.b n:0000 ~ FFFF b: 0 ~ F

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts):

Please refer to 1.1 Pin Definition of Serial Communication for detail.

Page 375: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-69

Matsushita FP PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1.

Controller station number: 238.

Control area/status area: DT0 / DT10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Internal Relay WRn n: 0 ~ 886, N/A Word

Special Internal Relay 900 ~ 910

Link Relay WLn n: 0 ~ 639 N/A Word

External Input Relay WXn n: 0 ~ 511 N/A Word

External Output Relay WYn n: 0 ~ 511 N/A Word

Timer/Counter P.V. EVn n: 0 ~ 3071 N/A Word

Timer/Counter S.V. SVn n: 0 ~ 3071 N/A Word

Data Register DTn n: 0 ~ 32764 N/A Word

Link Data Register LDn n: 0 ~ 8447 N/A Word

File Register FLn n: 0 ~ 32764 N/A Word

Special Data Register DT9_n n: 0 ~ 511 N/A Word

DT9_0 ~ DT9_511 are applicable for FP0 T32C, FP2, FP2SH, FP10SH controllers. (Special data

registers are all within the range of DT90000 ~ DT9XXXX).

The actual transmitted address of DT9_n is 90000 + n (for DT). For example, the actual transmitted

address of DT9_1 is 90001 (for DT), the actual transmitted address of DT9_2 is 90002 (for DT) and vise

versa.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Internal Relay Rnb n: 0 ~ 886 b: 0 ~ f

Special Internal Relay n: 900 ~ 910 b: 0 ~ f

Link Relay Lnb n: 0 ~ 639 b: 0 ~ f

External Input Relay Xnb n: 0 ~ 511 b: 0 ~ f

External Output Relay Ynb n: 0 ~ 511 b: 0 ~ f

Timer Flag Contact Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 3071

Counter Flag Contact Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 3071

Page 376: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-70 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Increase the range of read / write address (for FP2SH / FP10SH controllers).

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-232)

Controller 5 pin Mini DIN male

(RS-232 for FP0)

Controller 5 pin Mini DIN male

(RS-232 for FP0)

RXD (2) (2) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3) RXD

(1) SG

Top View

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232 for FP1)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232 for FP1)

RXD (2) (2) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3) RXD

(7) GND

(4) RTS

(5) CTS

Top View

1 2 3

Pin1

Page 377: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-71

Mirle FAMA SC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: 40100 / 40200.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

Output Registers Wn n: 40001 ~ 50000 N/A Word

Input Registers Wn n: 30001 ~ 40000 N/A Word

Input Registers is “read only”.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Discrete Outputs Bn N/A n: 1 ~ 10000

Discrete Inputs Bn N/A n: 10001 ~ 20000

Discrete Inputs is “read only”.

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-232)

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) SG

Top View

Pin1

Page 378: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-72 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Mitsubishi FX/FX2N PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.

Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)

communication is allowed.)

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

NOTE

1) If connecting to Mitsubishi FXxN series PLC, the user can use both FX2N and FX series communication

protocol.

2) If connecting to Mitsubishi FX series PLC, the user can only use FX series communication protocol.

3) Some registers of Mitsubishi PLCs are “read only”, however, when you write these “read only” registers,

PLCs will not report any communication error to HMI and this will cause HMI errors. Please be aware of

this when editing PLC program (this normally occurs when using FX series protocol when connecting to

a FXxN series PLC).

4) If connecting to Mitsubishi FXxN series PLC, it is recommended for the user to use FX2N protocol.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 3064 N/A Byte

Special Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 8000 ~ 8248 N/A Byte

Status Relay Sn n: 0 ~ 992 N/A Byte

Input Relay Xn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Byte

Output Relay Yn n: 0 ~ 360(octal) N/A Byte

Timer PV Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

16-bit Counter PV Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word

32-bit Counter PV Cn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Double Word

Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 7999 N/A Word

Special Data Register Dn n: 8000 ~ 8255 N/A Word

Auxiliary Relay/ Special Auxiliary Relay/ Status Relay/ Input Relay /Output Relay: Address must be the

multiple of 8.

Page 379: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-73

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 3071

Special Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 8000 ~ 8255

Status Relay Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 999

Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)

Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)

Timer Flag Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Counter Flag Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-422

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 8pin Mini DIN male (RS-422)

Controller 8pin Mini DIN male

(RS-422)

RXD+ (2) (7) TXD+

RXD- (1)

TXD+ (3)

(4) TXD-

(2) RXD+

TXD- (4) (1) RXD-

GND (5) (3) SG

Top View

RS-422

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 25 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 25 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Pin 2 ( RXD+) Pi n3 SDB ( TXD+)

Pi n 1 ( RXD-)

Pin 4 ( TXD-)

Pi n16 SDA (TXD-)

Pin 15 RDA (RXD-)

Pin 3 ( TXD+) Pin 2 RDB (RXD+)

Pin 7 ( RTS+) Pin4 (CTS+)

Pi n 8 ( CTS+)

Pin 6 ( RTS-)

Pi n5 (RTS+)

Pin 17 (CT S-)

Pin 9 ( CTS-) Pin 18 (RTS-)

Pin 20

Pin 21

1 4 7

2

3

Pin1

Page 380: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-74 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Mitsubishi FX3U PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.

Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)

communication is allowed.)

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 7679 N/A Word

Special Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 8000 ~ 8511 N/A Word

Status Relay Sn n: 0 ~ 4095 N/A Word

Input Relay Xn n: 0 ~ 377(octal) N/A Word

Output Relay Yn n: 0 ~ 377(octal) N/A Word

Timer PV Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

16-bit Counter PV Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word

32-bit Counter PV Cn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Double Word

Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 7999 N/A Word

Special Data Register Dn n: 8000 ~ 8511 N/A Word

Auxiliary Relay/ Special Auxiliary Relay/ Status Relay/ Input Relay /Output Relay: Address must be the

multiple of 16.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 7679

Special Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 8000 ~ 8511

Status Relay Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 4095

Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)

Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 377(octal)

Timer Flag Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Counter Flag Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Page 381: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-75

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-422

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 8pin Mini DIN male (RS-422)

Controller 8pin Mini DIN male

(RS-422)

RXD+ (2) (7) TXD+

RXD- (1)

TXD+ (3)

(4) TXD-

(2) RXD+

TXD- (4) (1) RXD-

GND (5) (3) SG

Top View

1 4 7

2

3

Page 382: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-76 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Mitsubishi A Series AJ71UC24 Communication Module Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1.

Controller Station number: 0.

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

NOTE

1) This driver utilizes CheckSum.

2) Please set “PLC Mode” switch to position 5.

3) If OUTPUT Relay (Y) and Special Data Relay (SM) are set to 1, PLC will stop communication and the

communication will not recover automatically. PLC will need to be manually reset.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Input Xn n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Output Yn n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Link Relay Bn n: 0 ~ FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Internal Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Special Internal Relay SMn n: 9000 ~ 9255 N/A Word (9000 + multiple of 16)

Latch Relay Ln n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Annunciator Fn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Timer Value TNn n: 0 ~ 999 N/A Word

Counter Value CNn n: 0 ~ 999 N/A Word

Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word

Special Data Register SDn n: 9000 ~ 9255 N/A Word

File Register Rn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word

Link Register Wn n: 0 ~ FFF N/A Word

Page 383: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-77

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF

Output Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF

Link Relay Bn N/A n: 0 ~ FFF

Internal Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 8191

Special Internal Relay SMn N/A n: 9000 ~ 9255

Latch Relay Ln N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Annunciator Fn N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Timer Contact TSn N/A n: 0 ~ 999

Timer Coil TCn N/A n: 0 ~ 999

Counter Contact CSn N/A n: 0 ~ 999

Counter Coil CCn N/A n: 0 ~ 999

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-422

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller Cable Connector (RS-422)

RXD+ (2) SDA

RXD- (1)

TXD+ (3)

SDB

RDA

TXD- (4) RDB

Page 384: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-78 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Mitsubishi A2A/A2AS/A2USH A1SH/A3N/A2ASH (CPU-S1) CPU Port Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1.

Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)

communication is allowed.)

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

NOTE

1) This driver supports all Mitsubishi A series CPU port. Mitsubishi A series CPU port can be divided into

the following five categories according the used CPU code (used during communication):

A0J2…

A1N…

A1S ( / A2S / A2N …)

A3N ( / A1SH / A2SH …)

A2A ( / A2AS / A2USH …)

Delta HMI can support A2USH CPU port (same as A2A, A2AS CPU port.) and A1SH CPU port (same as

A3N, A2ASH CPU port.).

2) L and M: The communication address of L is the same as communication address of M.

3) PX and X:

In Mitsubishi A2A PLC, the communication address of PX and X are the same.

In other Mitsubishi A series PLCs, X is from odd address and PX is from even address. That is one place

where PX and X differ.

4) X, Y, B, M, SM, L, F, PX ----(Word),

X, Y, B, M, SM, L, F, PX ----(Bit),

When PLC station number is set to 255, only the value of even addresses will be read/written.

When PLC station number is set to other number (not 255), all value of all addresses will be read/written.

5) R address: R address will be different according to the size of File Register responded from PLC.

For example, A2USH: 1K: 3800 ~ 4000H

2K: 3000 ~ 4000H

3K: 2800 ~ 4000H

4K: 2000 ~ 4000H

5K: 4000 ~ 6800H(cy)

6K: 4000 ~ 7000H(cy)

File Register: PLC must be started correctly or the read / write value will be incorrect.

Page 385: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-79

6) Max. read/write registers & relays for communication once

128 Words (256 bytes) Registers

64 Words (128 bytes) Relays

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Input Xn n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Output Yn n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Link Relay Bn n: 0 ~ FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Internal Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Special Internal Relay SMn n: 9000 ~ 9255 N/A Word (9000 + multiple of 16)

Latch Relay Ln n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Annunciator Fn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Timer Value TNn n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word

Counter Value CNn n: 0 ~ 1023 N/A Word

Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word

Special Data Register SDn n: 9000 ~ 9255 N/A Word

File Register Rn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word

Link Register Wn n: 0 ~ FFF N/A Word

Input Card Register PXn n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF

Output Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF

Link Relay Bn N/A n: 0 ~ FFF

Internal Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 8191

Special Internal Relay SMn N/A n: 9000 ~ 9255

Latch Relay Ln N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Annunciator Fn N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Timer Contact TSn N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Timer Coil TCn N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Counter Contact CSn N/A n: 0 ~ 1023

Counter Coil CCn N/A n: 0 ~ 1023

Input Card Register PXn N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF

Page 386: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-80 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-422

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 25 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 25 pin D-SUB male(RS-422)

Pin 2 ( RXD+) Pi n3 SDB ( TXD+)

Pi n 1 ( RXD-)

Pin 4 ( TXD-)

Pi n16 SDA (TXD-)

Pin 15 RDA (RXD-)

Pin 3 ( TXD+) Pin 2 RDB (RXD+)

Pin 7 ( RTS+) Pin4 (CTS+)

Pi n 8 ( CTS+)

Pin 6 ( RTS-)

Pi n5 (RTS+)

Pin 17 (CT S-)

Pin 9 ( CTS-) Pin 18 (RTS-)

Pin 20

Pin 21

Explanation

How to set File Register (R) for Mitsubishi A serial PLC:

1. Startup MELSOFT series GX Developer.

2. Open “Project Data List” windows. (“View” Option)

3. Double click Parameter \ PLC Parameter, and open “Setting” window.

4. Set Memory Capacity \ File Register (0 ~8).

5. Press “End” button on the bottom and complete the setting.

6. Execute OnLine\Write to PLC.

7. Enable the “Parameter \ PLC/Network” and “File register \ Main” option (check the check box next to

“Parameter \ PLC/Network” and “File register \ Main”).

8. Press “Execute” button.

9. Complete

Pin1

Page 387: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-81

Mitsubishi Q Series CPU Port Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 19200, 8, ODD, 1.

Controller Station number: 0. (no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)

communication is allowed.)

Control area/status area: D-0 / D-10.

NOTE

1) Please notice that no PLC station number in protocol, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication

is allowed.

2) If communication baud rate is not correct, HMI will set PLC baud rate as HMI baud rate automatically.

Therefore, do not worry if the baud rate is set incorrectly.

3) This driver support Mitsubishi Q00 and Q00J series with password protection models.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Input X-n n: 0 ~ 1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Output Y-n n: 0 ~ 1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Direct Input DX-n n: 0 ~ 1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Direct Output DY-n n: 0 ~ 15 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Latch Relay L-n n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Annunciator F-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Edge Relay V-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Step Relay S-n n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Link Relay B-n n: 0 ~ 1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Special Link Relay SB-n n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Internal Relay M-n n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Special Internal Relay SM-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Timer Value TN-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word

Retentive Timer Value SN-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word

Counter Value CN-n n: 0 ~ 1023 N/A Word

Data Register D-n n: 0 ~ 12287 N/A Word

Special Data Register SD-n n: 0 ~ 2047 N/A Word

Index Register Z-n n: 0 ~ 15 N/A Word

File Register R-n n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A Word

Page 388: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-82 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

File Register ZR-n n: 0 ~ 32767 N/A Word

Link Register W-n n: 0 ~ 1FFF N/A Word

Special Link Register SW-n n: 0 ~ 7FF N/A Word

Xn, Yn, DXn, Bn, SBn, Wn, SWn : n is in hexadecimal.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input X-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1FFF

Output Y-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1FFF

Direct input DX-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1FFF

Direct output DY-n N/A n: 0 ~ 15

Latch Relay L-n N/A n: 0 ~ 8191

Annunciator F-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Edge Relay V-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Step Relay S-n N/A n: 0 ~ 8191

Link Relay B-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1FFF

Special Link Relay SB-n N/A n: 0 ~ 7FF

Internal Relay M-n N/A n: 0 ~ 8191

Special Internal Relay SM-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Timer Contact TS-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Timer Coil TC-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Retentive timer Contact SS-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Retentive timer Coil SC-n N/A n: 0 ~ 2047

Counter Contact CS-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1023

Counter Coil CC-n N/A n: 0 ~ 1023

Xn, Yn, DXn, Bn, SBn : n is in hexadecimal.

Page 389: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-83

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 6 pin Mini DIN male (RS-232)

Controller 6 pin Mini DIN male

(RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) SD (TXD)

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(1) RD (RXD)

(3) GND

(5) DSR (DR)

(6) DTR (ER)

Top View

2

6 5 3

1

Page 390: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-84 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Mitsubishi Q Series Computer Link Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 19200, 8, None, 1.

Controller Station number: 0.

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

NOTE

1) This communication protocol supports Q series RS232 communication module (QJ71C24-R2) and

RS422 communication protocol (QJ71C24N).

2) Before using this communication protocol, the user needs to set communication module via PC software ,

GX Developer. For more detailed information regarding the setting method, please refer to Mitsubishi

User Manual named “User’s Manual (Basic) - Q Corresponding Series Communication Module”.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Input Xn n: 0-1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Output Yn n: 0-1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Internal Relay Mn n: 0-8191 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Special Internal Relay Mn n: 9000-9255 N/A Word (9000 + multiple of 16)

Link Relay Bn n: 0-1FFF N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Annunciator Fn n: 0-2047 N/A Word (multiple of 16)

Timer Value TNn n: 0-2047 N/A Word

Counter Value CNn n: 0-2047 N/A Word

Data Register Dn n: 0-8191 N/A Word

Special Data Register Dn n: 9000-9255 N/A Word

Link Register Wn n: 0-1FFF N/A Word

Xn, Yn, Bn, Wn : n is in hexadecimal.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Xn N/A n: 0-1FFF

Output Yn N/A n: 0-1FFF

Internal Relay Mn N/A n: 0-8191

Special Internal Relay Mn N/A n: 9000-9255

Page 391: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-85

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Link Relay Bn N/A n: 0-1FFF

Annunciator Fn N/A n: 0-2047

Timer Contact TSn N/A n: 0-2047

Timer Coil TCn N/A n: 0-2047

Counter Contact CS-n N/A n: 0-2047

Counter Coil CC-n N/A n: 0-2047

Xn, Yn, Bn : n is in hexadecimal.

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3) RXD

(5 ) SG

(8) RTS

(7) CTS

(4) DSR (DR)

(6) DTR (ER)

Top View

RS-422

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller Cable Connector (RS-422)

RXD+ (2) SDA ( 1)

RXD- (1)

TXD+ (3)

SDB ( 2)

RDA ( 3)

TXD- (4) RDB (4)

GND (5) SG

Pin1

Page 392: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-86 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Mitsubishi FX Series PLC via Computer Link Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.

Controller Station number: 0.

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

NOTE

1) This communication protocol supports FX series RS485 and RS232 communication module.

2) The default setting of this communication protocol is to support RS485 communication module. If the

user needs to use RS232 communication module, the user must change the communication setting from

RS485 to RS232 manually.

3) For more detailed information regarding the communication setting method, please refer to Mitsubishi

Communication User Manual named “User’s Manual - Data Communication Edition”.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 0-7679 N/A Word

Special Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 8000-8511 N/A Word

Status Relay Sn n: 0-4095 N/A Word

Input Relay Xn n: 0-377(octal) N/A Word

Output Relay Yn n: 0-377(octal) N/A Word

Timer PV Tn n: 0-255 N/A Word

16-bit Counter PV Cn n: 0-199 N/A Word

32-bit Counter PV Cn n: 200-255 N/A Double Word

Data Register Dn n: 0-7999 N/A Word

Special Data Register Dn n: 8000-8511 N/A Word

Auxiliary Relay / Special Auxiliary Relay / Status Relay / Input Relay / Output Relay: Address must be

the multiple of 16.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 0-7679

Special Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 8000-8511

Status Relay Sn N/A n: 0-4095

Page 393: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-87

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0-377(octal)

Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0-377(octal)

Timer Flag Tn N/A n: 0-255

Counter Flag Cn N/A n: 0-255

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) TXD (3)

TXD ( 3)

GND (5)

RXD (2 )

GND (5)

Top View

RS-485

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller Communication Module

D- (1 ) SDB

D- (4 )

D+ (2)

RDB

SDA

D+ (3) RDA

G ND (5) GND

Pin1

Page 394: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-88 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Mitsubishi J2s Series Servo Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, Even, 1 (RS-232).

Controller Station number: 0.

Control area/status area: None / None.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Parameter List (cmd: 05/84) (NOTE 1) Pn n: 0 – 84 N/A Double word

Status Display (cmd: 01,8n/NA) (NOTE 1) Sn n: 0 – E N/A Double word

Alarm Number in history (cmd: 33,1n/NA) (NOTE 1) ANn n: 0 – 5 N/A Word

Alarm Occurrence time in history (AO) (cmd: 33,2n/NA) (NOTE 1) AOn n: 0 – 5 N/A Double word

Current Alarm Number (AC) (cmd: 02/NA) (NOTE 1) ACn n: 0 N/A Word

Status Display at alarm occurrence (AS) (cmd: 35,8/NA) (NOTE 1) ASn n: 0 N/A Double word

External input pin status (EI) (cmd: 12,40/92,00) (NOTE 1) EIn n: 0 N/A Double word

External output pin status (EO) (cmd: 12,C0/92,A0) (NOTE 1) EOn n: 0 N/A Double word

Operation mode selection (OP) (cmd: NA/8B,00) (NOTE 1) OPn n: 0 N/A Word

Speed for test operation (TSPD) (cmd: NA/A0,10) (NOTE 1) TSPDn n: 0 N/A Word

Acceleration/deceleration for test operation (TACC) (cmd: NA/A0,11) (NOTE 1)

TACCn n: 0 N/A Double word

Distance for test operation (TDIS) (cmd: NA/A0,13) (NOTE 1) TDISn n: 0 N/A Double word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Status display clear (SRST) (cmd: NA/81,00) (NOTE 1) SRSTb N/A b: 0

Alarm history clear (ACLR) (cmd: NA/82,20) (NOTE 1) ACLRb N/A b: 0

Page 395: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-89

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Alarm reset (ARST) (cmd: NA/82,00) (NOTE 1) ARSTb N/A b: 0

Turn off the external input signals (DI) (OFDI) (cmd: NA/90,00) (NOTE 1) OFDIb N/A b: 0

Changes the external output signals (DO) (CHDO) (cmd: NA/90,03) (NOTE 1) CHDOb N/A b: 0

Enable the disabled external input signals (ENDI) (cmd: NA/90,10) (NOTE 1) ENDIb N/A b: 0

Enable the disabled external output signals (ENDO) (cmd: NA/90,13) (NOTE 1) ENDOb N/A b: 0

Clear the time constant of acceleration in test operation mode (TCLR) (cmd: NA/A0,12) (NOTE 1)

TCLRb N/A b: 0

Temporary stop of position mode in test operation (TSTP) (cmd: NA/A0,15) (NOTE 1)

TSTPb N/A b: 0

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 20 pin CN3

GND (5 ) GND (1)

GND (11)

RXD (2 ) TXD ( 12)

TXD (3) RXD (2)

NOTE

1) Read / Write Limit

This communication protocol uses devices to simulate the operation of Servo, so there is a limit for the

device to read and write the command. In the column of register type and contact type, the string of

characters after “cmd:” indicates the corresponding Servo command that the device will read and write.

For example, the string of characters after “cmd:” of the register, Status display is 01,8n/NA. It means

that the device can read it but cannot write it. One more example, the string of characters after “cmd:” of

the Operation mode selection (OP) is N/A/8B,00. It means that the device can write it but cannot read it.

Page 396: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-90 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

MKS BY125 Low Cost Synchrocontroller Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.

Controller Station number: 11 (NOTE 1).

Control area/status area: None / None.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

n: 0 ~ 17,

40 ~ 41,

45 ~ 48,

50,

Data In Register / Setup Register Cn

90 ~ 92

N/A Double Word

Synchronizing (Differential Counter) SYN_ERRn n: 0 N/A Double Word

Integration register IRn n: 0 N/A Double Word

Actual Master speed MAS_SPDn n: 0 N/A Double Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Reset RSTn N/A n: 0

Jog Trim+ JOGTRIM_INCn N/A n: 0

Jog Trim- JOGTRIM_DECn N/A n: 0

Activate Data ACT_DATAn N/A n: 0

Store EEPROM STR_EEPROMn N/A n: 0

Index Slave IND_SLAn N/A n: 0

Index Master IND_MASn N/A n: 0

Page 397: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-91

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 20 pin CN3

Controller 20 pin CN3

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) SG

Top View

RS-485

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485) Controller Controller

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) SG

Top View

NOTE

1) The valid station number is in the range of 11 to 99. However, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90 cannot

be used as they are all broadcast station number.

00 for all broadcast

10 for the broadcast to 11 ~ 19

20 for the broadcast to 21 ~ 29

and vise versa.

2) Now the broadcast function is not provided, therefore, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90 cannot be used.

3) Only one data (1 Word/ 1 Double Word / 1 Bit) can be read and written for each communication. So, the

“Optimize” (Optimization for reading) selection in “Communication” tab in the “Configuration” dialog box

in “Options” menu (Options Configuration Communication) is cancelled.

4) When using RS-232 communication, the user only can use 3 pins (Pin 2, Pin 3 and Pin 5). DO NOT use

5 pins for RS-232 communication. Also, Pin 9 is for +5V. Do not confuse and connect to the wrong pin;

otherwise the serious damage may occur.

5) The effective addresses of Cn are not consecutive (5 blocks: C0~17, C40~41, C45~C48, C50,

C90~C92). When setting the addresses, do not exceed the block range. For example, when using a

Numeric Entry or Character Entry element, if the address is C15, the data length only can be 6 Words

Pin1

Pin1

Page 398: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-92 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

(C15, C16, C17). If the data length is out of this range, i.e. occupy other addresses except C0~C17, an

error may occur.

6) The effective addresses of Cn are not consecutive (5 blocks: C0~17, C40~41, C45~C48, C50,

C90~C92). However, when executing duplicate function (Decrease Address), the addresses will be

regarded as consecutive addresses. For example, the next address of C90 is C50; the next address of

C50 is C48; the next address of C45 is C41; the next address of C40 is C17.

7) When all Word address is written, the controllers all response ACK(0x06). But when all Word address is

read, the receive value will not change. The user needs to press ACT_DATA0 again and then the

receive value will be updated.

Page 399: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-93

MKS CT150 Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, E, 1. (RS-232)

Controller Station number: 11.

Control area/status area: None / None.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Data In Register Cn n: 0 ~ 25 N/A

Setup Register Cn n: 40 ~ 43 N/A

45 ~ 50

90 ~ 97

Error Count Err_CNT 0 N/A

LV Value LV_VAL 0 N/A

Printmark Error PRTMARK_ERR 0 N/A

Batch Counter BAT_CNT 0 N/A

Waste Counter WASTE_CNT 0 N/A

Line Speed LINE_SPD 0 N/A

Actual Cutting Length ACT_CUT_LEN 0 N/A

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Reset RST N/A 0

Jog Trim+ JOGTRIM_INC N/A 0

Jog Trim- JOGTRIM_DEC N/A 0

Read PI READ_PI N/A 0

Activate Data ACT_DATA N/A 0

Store Eeprom STR_EEPROM N/A 0

Start/Stop START_STOP N/A 0

Reset Mark Counter RSTMARK_CNT N/A 0

Page 400: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-94 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) SG

Top View

Pin1

Page 401: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-95

MKS MC700/720 Motion Controller Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1.

Controller Station number: 11 (NOTE 1).

Control area/status area: None / None.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

General Parameters GPn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word

Parameter Block for Slave 1 PB1_n n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word

Parameter Block for Slave 2 PB2_n n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word

Parameter Block for Slave 3 PB3_n n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word

Parameter Block for Slave 4 PB4_n n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word

Process Data PRODn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word

Communication Settings CSETn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word

Setup Settings STUPn n: 0 ~ 31 N/A Double Word

Status of Commands and Outputs S_COn n: 0 ~ 4 N/A Double Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Commands CMDb N/A b: 0 ~ 31

Outputs OUTb N/A b: 0 ~ 31

Status of Commands and Outputs S_COn.b n: 0 ~ 4 b: 0 ~ 31

Page 402: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-96 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (3 ) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2 ) RXD

(5 ) GND

Top View

RS-422

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

RXD- (1 ) (7 )T-

RXD+ (2)

TXD+ (3 )

(8 )T+

(6 )R+

TXD- (4) (1 )R-

Top View

RS-485

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

D+ (2 )T+ (8)

D+ (3 )

D- (1)T-(7)

D- (4)

Top View

NOTE

1) The valid station number is in the range of 11 to 99. However, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90 cannot

be used as they are all broadcast station number.

00 for all broadcast

10 for the broadcast to 11 ~ 19

20 for the broadcast to 21 ~ 29

and vise versa.

2) Now the broadcast function is not provided, therefore, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90 cannot be used.

Pin1

Pin1

Pin1

Page 403: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-97

3) Only one data (1 Word/ 1 Double Word / 1 Bit) can be read and written for each communication. So, the

“Optimize” (Optimization for reading) selection in “Communication” tab in the “Configuration” dialog box

in “Options” menu (Options Configuration Communication) is cancelled.

4) When using RS-232 communication, the user only can use 3 pins (Pin 2, Pin 3 and Pin 5). DO NOT use

5 pins for RS-232 communication. Also, Pin 9 is for +5V. Do not confuse and connect to the wrong pin;

otherwise the serious damage may occur.

Page 404: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-98 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Modbus(Master) --- 984 RTU / ASCII mode Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1. (ASCII)

9600, 8, EVEN, 1. (RTU)

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: W40100 / W40200.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Output Registers Wn n: 40001 ~ 50000 N/A Word

Input Registers Wn n: 30001 ~ 40000 N/A Word

Input Registers is “read only”.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Discrete Outputs Bn N/A n: 1 ~ 10000

Discrete Inputs Bn N/A n: 10001 ~ 20000

Discrete Inputs is “read only”.

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

Please refer to 1.1 Pin Definition of Serial Communication for detail.

Page 405: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-99

Modbus Hexadecimal Address (Master) --- RTU / ASCII mode Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1. (ASCII)

9600, 8, EVEN, 1. (RTU)

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: RW-0 / RW-10.

NOTE

1) The valid communication address starts from 0 and the format is hexadecimal. So the settable range are

0 to 65535 (i.e. 0 ~ FFFF in hexadecimal format).

2) The difference than “Standard Modbus” communication: (Protocol is the same)

The usage of setting communication address is different.

The range of communication address is different

The “Standard Modbus” communication is in decimal format. The start addresses are 40001, 30001, 1,

10001 and contains 10000 addresses respectively (40001 ~ 50000, 30001 ~ 40000, 1 ~ 10000, 10001 ~

20000).

The Modbus Hexadecimal Address (Master) is in hexadecimal format. The starting addresses are all

from 0 and there is 65536 addressing space (from 0 to FFFF) in each PDU (protocol data unit).

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Output Registers RW-n n: 0 ~ FFFF N/A Word

Input Registers R-n n: 0 ~ FFFF N/A Word

RW- : can Read and Write.

Converting the address to decimal format and plus 40001, it will immediately become the corresponding

“Standard Modbus” communication address.

R- (Input Registers) : Read only.

Converting the address to decimal format and plus 30001, it will immediately become the corresponding

“Standard Modbus” communication address.

Page 406: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-100 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Discrete Outputs RWB-n N/A n: 0 ~ FFFF

Discrete Inputs RB-n N/A n: 0 ~ FFFF

RWB- : can Read and Write.

Converting the address to decimal format and plus 1, it will immediately become the corresponding

“Standard Modbus” communication address.

RB- (Discrete Inputs) : Read only.

Converting the address to decimal format and plus 10001, it will immediately become the corresponding

“Standard Modbus” communication address.

NOTE

1) Only first 10000 addresses can be converted to ”Standard Modbus” communication address.

Page 407: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-101

Modbus nW (Master) --- RTU / ASCII mode Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1. (ASCII)

9600, 8, EVEN, 1. (RTU)

Controller station number: 1.

Control area/status area: W40100 / W40200.

NOTE

1) This driver can read consecutive communication address on the screen via one Modbus command to

improve the communication efficiency. For example, if there are 6 devices on the screen, and read the

data of the addresses W40100, W40101, W40102, W40200, W40201, W40300. It will read three times.

It will read W40100 3 Words at the first time, read W40200 2 Words at the second time and read

W40300 1 Word at the third time.

2) Ensure to check the box next to “Optimize” (Optimization for reading) selection in “Communication” tab in

the “Configuration” dialog box in “Options” menu (Options Configuration Communication). If

“Optimize” selection is unchecked, do not select “Data Length Limit”.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Output Registers Wn n: 40001 ~ 50000 N/A Word

Input Registers Wn n: 30001 ~ 40000 N/A Word

Input Registers is “read only”.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Discrete Outputs Bn N/A n: 1 ~ 10000

Discrete Inputs Bn N/A n: 10001 ~ 20000

Discrete Inputs is “read only”.

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

Please refer to 1.1 Pin Definition of Serial Communication for detail.

Page 408: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-102 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Modbus (Slave) --- RTU / ASCII mode Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 1. (ASCII)

9600, 8, EVEN, 1. (RTU)

Controller station number: 0. (Station number is not used in the protocol.)

Control area/status area: W40100 / 40200.

NOTE

1) HMI station number is Slave station number. (default setting is 0)

2) The relation between Modbus address and HMI internal registers.

Modbus address Data definition in HMI

W40001 ~ W41024 $0 ~ $1023 Internal register

W42001 ~ W43024 $M0 ~ $M1023 Non-volatile internal register

W44001 RCPNO Receipt number register

W45001 ~ ... RCP0 ~ RCPn Receipt register

B00001 ~ B01024 $2000.0 ~ $2063.15 Internal register (Bit)

B01025 ~ B02048 $M200.0 ~ $M263.15 Non-volatile internal register (Bit)

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Output Registers Wn n: 40001 ~ 50000 N/A Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Discrete Outputs Bn N/A n: 1 ~ 2048

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

Please refer to 1.1 Pin Definition of Serial Communication for detail.

Page 409: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-103

CrossReference Table (Inter Memoryof Delta HMI and Modbus Reference Address)

Inter Memory of Delta HMI

Modbus Reference Address

Supporting Modbus Function Address of Function

$0 40001 03H, 06H, 10H 0000H

$1 40002 03H, 06H, 10H 0001H

.

.

.

$1023 41024 03H, 06H, 10H 03FFH

$M0 42001 03H, 06H, 10H 07D0H

$M1 42002 03H, 06H, 10H 07D1H

.

.

.

$M1023 43024 03H, 06H, 10H 0BCFH

RCPNO 44001 03H, 06H 0FA0H

RCP0 45001 03H, 06H, 10H 1388H

RCP1 45002 03H, 06H, 10H 1389H

.

.

.

$2000.0 00001 01H, 05H, 0FH 0000H

$2000.1 00002 01H, 05H, 0FH 0001H

.

.

.

$2000.15 00016 01H, 05H, 0FH 000FH

$2001.0 00017 01H, 05H, 0FH 0010H

.

.

.

$2063.0 01009 01H, 05H, 0FH 03F0H

.

.

.

$2063.15 01024 01H, 05H, 0FH 03FFH

$M200.0 01025 01H, 05H, 0FH 0400H

Page 410: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-104 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Inter Memory of Delta HMI

Modbus Reference Address

Supporting Modbus Function Address of Function

$M200.1 01026 01H, 05H, 0FH 0401H

.

.

.

$M200.15 01040 01H, 05H, 0FH 040FH

$M201.0 01041 01H, 05H, 0FH 0410H

.

.

.

$M263.0 02033 01H, 05H, 0FH 07F0H

.

.

.

$M263.15 02048 01H, 05H, 0FH 07FFH

For example:

1. Read internal memory $100 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)

: 01 03 00 64 00 01 97 CR LF

Write the value of 1000 into internal memory $100 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)

: 01 06 00 64 03 E8 AA CR LF

2. Read internal memory $M100 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)

: 01 03 08 34 00 01 BF CR LF

Write the value of 888 into internal memory $M100 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)

: 01 06 08 34 03 78 42 CR LF

3. Read internal memory $2000.15 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)

: 01 01 00 0F 00 01 EE CR LF

Set internal memory $2000.15 of Delta HMI to ON (HMI station number: 1)

: 01 05 00 0F FF 00 EC CR LF

Set internal memory $2000.15 of Delta HMI to OFF (HMI station number: 1)

: 01 05 00 0F 00 00 EB CR LF

4. Read internal memory $M201.0 of Delta HMI (HMI station number: 1)

: 01 01 04 10 00 01 E9 CR LF

Set internal memory $M201.0 of Delta HMI to ON (HMI station number: 1)

: 01 05 04 10 FF 00 E7 CR LF

Set internal memory $M201.0 of Delta HMI to OFF (HMI station number: 1)

: 01 05 04 10 00 00 E6 CR LF

Page 411: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-105

Modicon TSX Micro (Uni-Telway) Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1.

Controller station number: 2.

Control area/status area: %MW0 / %MW10.

NOTE

1) HMI station needs to be adjusted to 1 ~ 8.

2) PLC station and HMI station can be the same.

3) The internal memory and relative parameters in PLC should be set properly first. Otherwise, it cannot

communicate except %S.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size

WORD_DEVICE_ Internal %MWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_ System %SWn n: 0 ~ 127 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_ Input %KWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A Word

%KWn is “read only”.

Contacts

Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.

BIT_DEVICE_ Internal %Mn:b n:0 ~ 65534 b:0 ~ 15

BIT_DEVICE_ System %Sn - n:0 ~ 127

BIT_DEVICE_ Internal1 %Mn - n:0 ~ 65534

%Mn: b is Bit address that corresponds to WORD_DEVICE_ Internal (%MWn).

%Mn is PLC internal relay address.

The read/write range of WORD_DEVICE_ Internal / BIT_DEVICE_ Internal depends on PLC used

memory.

Page 412: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-106 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

It needs to use specific cable of Modicon Uni-Telway. (RS-232) --- TSX PCX 1031

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (2 ) SD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3 ) RD

(5 ) SG

Top View

RS-485

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-485)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male

(RS-485)

RXD+ (2) (1) D+

TXD+ (3)

RXD- (1)

TXD- (4)

(2) D-

Top View

Pin1

1 2

Page 413: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-107

Modicon TSX Micro (Modbus RTU) Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 1.

Controller station number: 2.

Control area/status area: %MW0 / %MW10.

NOTE

1) HMI must select Modbus (Master) --- 984 RTU as the communication mode.

2) The communication mode of PLC should be switched to Modbus Slave by using PL7 software.

B. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-485

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male (RS-485)

Controller 8 pin Mini DIN male

(RS-485)

RXD+ (2) (1 ) D+

TXD+ (3)

RXD- (1 )

TXD- (4)

(2 ) D-

(5 )

(7 )

Top View

7

1 2 5

7

Page 414: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-108 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Modicon TWIDO Back to Table

Its function is the same as Modbus (Master) --- 984 RTU.

Page 415: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-109

Moeller PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, NONE, 1(RS-232).

Controller Station number: 2.

Control area/status area: MW0/MW10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data Length

Marker MW MWn n: 0-32766 N/A Byte

Diagnostic Status DSW DSWn n: 0-0 N/A Byte

Process Status PSW PSWn n: 0-0 N/A Byte

Diagnostic Counter DC DCn n: 0-15 N/A Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Marker M Mn.b n: 0-32766 b: 0-7

Diagnostic Status DS DSn.b n: 0-1 b: 0-7

Process Status PS PSn.b n: 0-1 b: 0-7

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) 5

TXD (3)

GND (5)

2

3 Top View

Page 416: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-110 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

NOTE

1) Communication Setting

The read and write range of register Marker (Device MW) of PS4 Series must be set via PC software or

PLC program before connecting to HMI; otherwise, the communication error may occur. The setting

range of Marker (Device MW) of PS3 Series is fixed between 0 and 2172 but the address 126 cannot be

used.

2) Device MW

Device MW is an even address, but Device M is not.

Page 417: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-111

NIKKI DENSO NCS-FI/FS Series Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, ODD, 2.

Controller station number: 1. (valid station number: 0 ~ 99)

Control area/status area: None.

NOTE

1) The valid station number is in the range of 0 to 99. If the station number is out of this range, it will

subtracted 100 from itself automatically until the station number is in the valid range.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Register Type Format Word No. Bit No. Data Size

WORD_DEVICE_ RRegister RW-n n: 0 ~ 3999 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_ RRegister RW-n n: 8000 ~ 9999 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_ DStatus XW-n n: 0 ~ 8 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_ DStatus DW-n n: 0 ~ 129 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_ RRegister RD-n n: 0-3999 N/A Double Word

WORD_DEVICE_ RRegister RD-n n: 8000-9999 N/A Double Word

WORD_DEVICE_ DStatus DD-n n: 0-129 N/A Double Word

NOTE

In order for DOP series HMI to be compatible with this controller, DOP series HMI provides various types of

data. Please refer to the following description:

1) RW-n, RD-n, RB-nb all have corresponding relation (just the data format is different). They all refer to the

same address n.

DW-n, DD-n both have corresponding relation (just the data format is different). They all refer to the

same address n.

XW-n, XB-nb both have corresponding relation (just the data format is different). They all refer to the

same address n.

(In the above format name, the second alphabet represents the data format, W represents Word, D

represents Double Word and B represents Bit)

2) The data size of RW-n, DW-n is defined as Word in DOP series HMI and each data address is regarded

as an individual Word address. The data order uses "Little Endian" architecture which means that the low

word of the number is stored in memory at the lowest address, and the high word at the highest address.

(such as Intel processors (those used in PC's) use "Little Endian" byte order)

Page 418: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-112 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

For example, if setting the starting address as RW900 and the data size is Double Word, the read/write

value will be a Double Word which contains RW900(low word) and RW901(high word).

In actual application case, if the user sets the data size of RW-n, DW-n as Word, there is no data order

reverse problem. However, if the user sets the data size of RW-n, DW-n as Double Word, as this

controller use "Big Endian" architecture which means that the high word of the number is stored in

memory at the lowest address, and the low word at the highest address (such as Motorola processors

(those used in Mac's) use "Big Endian" byte order), a data order reverse problem will occur.

3) The data size of RD-n, DD-n is defined as Double Word in DOP series HMI and every two data

addresses is regarded as an individual Double Word address. The data order use "Big Endian"

architecture (see the meaning above).

For example, if setting the starting address as RD900 and the data size is Double Word, the read/write

value will be a Double Word which contains RW900(high word) and RW901(low word).

In actual application case, if the users set the data size of RD-n, DD-n as Double Word, there is no data

order reverse problem and the data display on HMI and the controller will be the same. However, if the

users set the data size of RD-n, DD-n as Word, only the low word will display and the high word will be

set to 0 automatically. For example, if setting the starting address as RD900 and the data size is Word,

only the value of RD901(low word) will display. If the write value is 100 at this time, DOP series HMI will

set the value of RD901(high word) to 0 and write the value 100 into RD901(low word).

4) X-nb and DW-n both have corresponding relation -------- Read DW-n, Write X-nb

DW-0 — X-0b, (b=0~F) DW-1 — X-1b, (b=0~F) DW-2 — X-2b, (b=0~F) DW-4 — X-3b, (b=0~F) DW-104 — X-4b, (b=0~F) DW-105 — X-5b, (b=0~F) DW-106 — X-6b, (b=0~F) DW-107 — X-7b, (b=0~F) DW-108 — X-8b, (b=0~F)

5) DW-n, DD-n are “read only”. If the users write any value into them, HMI will show error message

“Command Can Not be Executed…. ” on the screen.

Contacts

Contact type Format Word No. Bit No.

BIT_DEVICE_ RRegister RB-nb n: 0 ~ 3999 b:0 ~ F

BIT_DEVICE_ RRegister RB-nb n: 8000 ~ 9999 b:0 ~ F

BIT_DEVICE_ BitControl XB-nb n:0 ~ 8 b:0 ~ F

Page 419: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-113

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-422

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 14 pin special male (RS-422)

Controller 14 pin special male (RS-422)

RXD- (1) (9) TXD (B)

RXD+ (2)

TXD+ (3)

(2) TXD (A)

(4) RXD (A)

TXD- (4) (11) RXD (B)

GND (5) (14) GND

Cable (PLC side (J1), male).

Top View

Page 420: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-114 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Omron C Series PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 2.

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: DM0 / DM10.

This driver can support OMRON C/CPM series PLC simultaneously.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

IR area IRn n: 0 ~ 511 N/A Word

HR area HRn n: 0 ~ 99 N/A Word

AR area ARn n: 0 ~ 27 N/A Word

LR area LRn n: 0 ~ 63 N/A Word

TC area TCn n: 0 ~ 511 N/A Word

DM area DMn n: 0 ~ 6655 N/A Word

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

IR area IRnb n: 0 ~ 511 b: 00 ~ 15

HR area HRnb n: 0 ~ 99 b: 00 ~ 15

AR area ARnb n: 0 ~ 27 b: 00 ~ 15

LR area LRnb n: 0 ~ 63 b: 00 ~ 15

TC area TCn N/A n: 0 ~ 511

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

1:1 Host Link via RS-232C converter

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3) RXD

(9) SG

(4) RS

(5) CS

Top View

Pin1

Page 421: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-115

DOP

9 pin D-SUB male (RS-432) Controller

25 pin D-SUB male (RS-432) Controller

25 pin D-SUB male (RS-432)

RXD (2) (2 ) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3 ) RXD

(7 ) SG

(4 ) RS

(5 ) CS

RS-422

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

RXD- (1 ) (9 )TXD-

RXD+ (2)

TXD+ (3)

(5 )TXD+

(1 )RXD+

TXD- (4) (6 )RXD-

Top View

Pin1

Pin1

Page 422: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-116 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Omron CJ1/CS1 Series PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 7, EVEN, 2. (RS-232)

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

This driver can support OMRON CS/CJ/CP1/CQM/CV/CVM series PLC simultaneously.

NOTE

The meaning of Communication Error Message:

1) Word Device:

The Device Name and Address Value will display. For example, if using CIO, H, A, D, E, T, C, W, EM, IR,

DR, TK, it will show CIOn, Hn, An, Dn, Em.n, Tn, Cn, Wn, EMn, IRn, DRn, TKn respectively. “n” is the

Address Value.

2) Bit Device:

The Device Name and Word Address Value will display, but the Bit Address Value will not. For example,

if using CIO, H, A, D, E, T, C, W, EM, IR, DR, TK, it will show CIOBn, HBn, ABn, DBn, EBm.n, TBn, CBn,

WBn, EMBn, IRBn, DRBn, TKBn respectively. “n” is the Word Address Value.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

CIO area CIOn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word

Hold area Hn n: 0 ~ 999 N/A Word

Auxiliary area An n: 0 ~ 999 N/A Word

DM area Dn n: 0 ~ 65535 N/A Word

EM area Em.n M: 0 ~ 12 (bank no.) n: 0 ~ 65535

N/A Word

Timer PVs Tn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word

Counter PVs Cn n: 0 ~ 9999 N/A Word

Work area Wn n: 0 ~ 999 N/A Word

EM Current Bank area EMn n: 0 ~ 65535 N/A Word

Index Register IRn n: 0 ~ 99 N/A Double Word

DR area DRn n: 0 ~ 99 N/A Word

TK area TKn n: 0 ~ 1022 (Even No.) N/A Byte

Page 423: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-117

CJ1M Models: An: A0-A477 is “read only”.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

CIO area CIOBnbb n: 0 ~ 9999 bb: 00 ~ 15

Hold area HBnbb n: 0 ~ 999 bb: 00 ~ 15

Auxiliary area ABnbb n: 0 ~ 999 bb: 00 ~ 15

DM area DBnbb n: 0 ~ 65535 bb: 00 ~ 15

EM area EBm.nbb n: 0 ~ 65535

m: 0 ~ 12 (bank no.) bb: 00 ~ 15

Timer area TBn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999

Counter area CBn N/A n: 0 ~ 9999

Work area WBnbb n: 0 ~ 999 bb: 00 ~ 15

EM Current Bank area EMBnbb n: 0 ~ 65535 bb: 00 ~ 15

Index Register IRBnbb n: 0 ~ 99 bb: 00 ~ 31

DR area DRBnbb n: 0 ~ 99 bb: 00 ~ 15

TK area TKBnbb n: 0 ~ 1022 (Even No.)

bb: 00 ~ 15

NOTE

1) The following address cannot be written:

IRn and DRn: It is not valid if the users write them. HMI will not show any error message if the write

operation is done.

An and Abnbb: Some range of An and Abnbb (Auxiliary area) is “read only”.

TKn / TKBnbb / TBn / CBn / EMBnbb / IRBnbb / DRBnbb: Writing these addresses is not allowed. If

the write operation is done, the error will occur and display the error message “Command Can Not

be Executed…” on the screen of HMI.

2) The unit of IR address is “Double Word”.

3) The unit of TK address is “Byte” and it should be even number.

Page 424: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-118 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

CJ1M CPU module

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3) RXD

(9) SG

(4) RS

(5) CS

Top View

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-432)

Controller 25 pin D-SUB male (RS-432)

Controller 25 pin D-SUB male (RS-432)

RXD (2) (2 ) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3 ) RXD

(7 ) SG

(4 ) RS

(5 ) CS

RS-422

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

RXD- (1 ) (9 )TXD-

RXD+ (2)

TXD+ (3)

(5 )TXD+

(1 )RXD+

TXD- (4) (6 )RXD-

Top View

Pin1

Pin1

Pin1

Page 425: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-119

Omron TPM1A PLC Back to Table

Its function is the same as Omron C Series PLC.

Page 426: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-120 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Siemens S7 200 PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, EVEN, 1.

Controller station number: 2.

Control area/status area: VW0 / VW10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Register

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Timer Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A

Analog Input Word AIWn n: 0 ~ 30 N/A

Counter Cn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A

Analog Output Word AQWn n: 0 ~ 30 N/A

Input Image IWn n: 0 ~ 14 N/A

Input Image IDn n: 0 ~ 12 N/A

Output Image QWn n: 0 ~ 14 N/A

Output Image QDn n: 0 ~ 12 N/A

Special Bits SMWn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A

Special Bits SMDn n: 0 ~ 197 N/A

Internal Bits MWn n: 0 ~ 98 N/A

Internal Bits MDn n: 0 ~ 96 N/A

Data Area VWn n: 0 ~ 9998 N/A

(DBWn) (n: 0 ~ 9998)

Data Area VDn n: 0 ~ 9996 N/A

Special S SWn n: 0 ~ 99 N/A

Special S SDn n: 0 ~ 97 N/A

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Timer Bit Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Counter Bit Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Input Image In.b n: 0 ~ 15 b: 0 ~ 7

Output Image Qn.b n: 0 ~ 15 b: 0 ~ 7

Special Bit SMn.b n: 0 ~ 200 b: 0 ~ 7

Internal Bit Mn.b n: 0 ~ 99 b: 0 ~ 7

Data Area Bit Vn.b n: 0 ~ 9999 b: 0 ~ 7

Page 427: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-121

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Special S Bit Sn.b n: 0 ~ 100 b: 0 ~ 7

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

via RS-232 / PPI Multi-Master Cable (Connecting DOP series HMI and PPI cable)

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

RXD (2) (2) RD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(3) TD

(5) GND

Top View

RS-485

via PLC Program Port (RS-485)

DOP Series 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

RXD+ (2) (3)TXD/RXD+

TXD+ (3)

RXD- (1)

TXD- (4)

GND (5) (5)SG

(8)TXD/RXD-

Top View

Pin1

Pin1

Page 428: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-122 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

Siemens S7 300 PLC (with PC Adapter) Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 38400, 8, ODD, 1. (RS-232).

Controller station number: 2.

(Communication via PC adapter, PLC station will not be used, therefore, only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC)

communication is allowed.)

Control area/status area: DBW0 / DBW20.

NOTE

1) PLC DB memory (DBm.DBWn, DBm.DBDn, DBm.DBXn.b) must be open so that HMI can read/write.

2) The reason for using PC adapter:

When communicating via PC adapter, it is profibus with 187.5 K baudrate at PLC side. Therefore, the

network structure is faster and steadier.

When HMI communicates with PLC without PC adapter directly, the protocol will be complicated and it

needs to lower PLC baud rate to 19200 due to HMI baudrate limit.

3) Baud rate setting

It needs to set PLC baud rate to 187.5 K and higher. (it cannot use 19.2K)

It needs to set baud rate of two sides when using PC Adapter

i) "PLC side": It needs to set same baudrate as PLC side (as previous item it needs to set

PLC baud rate to 187.5 K and higher and cannot use 19.2K)

ii) "HMI side": it can select 38.4K or 19.2K by using switch on the cable. (only these two

choices)

iii) HMI baud rate: it needs to set the baud rate of HMI side of PC adapter as previous item to

38.4K or 19.2K) (protocol setting is still 8, ODD, 1)

iv) There is no setting for PLC station and HMI station, so it won’t have the communication

problem with error station setting.

v) PC Adapter :

The power LED will be lit once connect to PLC. (power supply of PC adapter is from PLC)

If communication is OK, the communication LED will be blink. Otherwise, it will be dark.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Register

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Image IWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A

Input Image IDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A

Page 429: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-123

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Output Image QWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A

Output Image QDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A

Internal Bits MWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A

Internal Bits MDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A

Data Area DBm.DBWn n: 0 ~ 65534 m: 1 ~ 255

DBm.DBDn n: 0 ~ 65532 m: 1 ~ 255

Data Area (DB10) DBWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A

DBDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A

VWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A

VDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A

Timer Tn n: 0-65535 N/A

Counter Cn n: 0-65535 N/A

NOTE

1) The valid digit number of the value for the T(Timer) and C(Counter) is 3-digits only. Therefore, please

enter a 3-digit number. If entering a number that exceeds 3 digits, only the first 3 digits are valid (decimal

format). The other digits of the value for the T(Timer) will be replaced as 0 and the other digits of the

value for the C(Counter) will be abandoned. For example, assume that the users enter the value “12345”,

the actual write value for the T(Timer) will be “12300” and the actual write value for the C(Counter) will be

“123”.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Image In.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7

Output Image Qn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7

Internal Bit Mn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7

Data Area Bit DBm.DBXn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7

m = 1 ~ 255

Data Area Bit (10 DB) DBXn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7

Vn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7

NOTE

1) For all contacts when performing “Multiple Duplicate” function:

If it exceeds 65535 when increasing, it will be regarded as 0.

If it is less than 0, it will be regarded as 655XX.

Page 430: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-124 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

HMI connects to PC Adaptor

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male

Controller 9 pin D-SUB female Controller

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) GND

(8) CTS

(7) RTS

RTS (7)

CTS (8)

Top View

Pin1

Page 431: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-125

Siemens S7 300 PLC (without PC Adaptor) Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 19200, 8, EVEN, 1. (RS-485).

Controller station number: 2.

Control area/status area: DBW0 / DBW20.

NOTE

1) Please notice that only 1(HMI) to 1 (PLC) communication is allowed.

2) PLC baud rate should be changed to 19200. (8, EVEN, 1.).

3) DB must be open, otherwise the related addresses can not be read and write.

(The related addresses are: DB.DBW, DB.DBD, DBW, DBD, VW, VD, DB.DBX, DBX, V)

4) HMI station must be set to 0 ~ 15. If it is out of this range, it will be changed to 15 automatically. PLC

station number must be set to 0 ~ 15.

5) The communication cable is the same as S7 200 series (RS-485).

6) If not connecting to communication cable after 5 seconds, HMI will show error message on the screen. If

connecting to communication cable, it is needed to power on HMI again, and then the communication

can be found.

7) After power in connected to HMI, HMI must accept the notification from PLC and then connection will be

established. The first time connection will take more time, but in normal condition, it should be connected

in 5 seconds.

8) This protocol is a token ring communication protocol (HMI needs to communicate with PLC for many

times for completing 1 command.) so the response of HMI will be slower (compared with other brands of

PLCs when the baud rate setting is set to the same value). The communication speed of S7 300 PLC

(without PC Adaptor) is usually slower than the other controllers, but it is the same as the communication

speed of S7 300 PLC (with PC Adaptor).

9) When connecting to S7 300 PLC, the communication error may occur occasionally. The user can adjust

the HMI communication response time via Extra function which can be found by clicking Option >

Configuration > Communication.

Page 432: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-126 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

How many COM ports are connected to S7 300 PLC, how may items can be set.

Page 433: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-127

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Register

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Image IWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A

Input Image IDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A

Output Image QWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A

Output Image QDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A

Internal Bits MWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A

Internal Bits MDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A

Data Area DBm.DBWn n: 0 ~ 65534 m: 1 ~ 255 (Note 1)

DBm.DBDn n: 0 ~ 65532 m: 1 ~ 255 (Note 1)

Data Area (DB10) DBWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A

DBDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A

VWn n: 0 ~ 65534 N/A

VDn n: 0 ~ 65532 N/A

Timer Tn n: 0 ~ 65535 N/A

Counter Cn n: 0 ~ 65535 N/A

NOTE

1) High Byte of Bit No.

The valid digit number of the value for the T(Timer) and C(Counter) is 3-digits only. Therefore, please

enter a 3-digit number. If entering a number that exceeds 3 digits, only the first 3 digits are valid (decimal

format). The other digits of the value for the T(Timer) will be replaced as 0 and the other digits of the

value for the C(Counter) will be abandoned. For example, assume that the users enter the value “12345”,

the actual write value for the T(Timer) will be “12300” and the actual write value for the C(Counter) will

be “123”.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Image In.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)

Output Image Qn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)

Internal Bit Mn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)

Data Area Bit DBm.DBXn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)

m = 1 ~ 255 (Note 3)

Data Area Bit (DB 10) DBXn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)

Vn.b n: 0 ~ 65535 b: 0 ~ 7 (Note 2)

Page 434: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-128 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

NOTE

2) Low Byte of Bit No.

3) High Byte of Bit No.

4) For all timers, counters and contacts when performing “Multiple Duplicate” function:

If it exceeds 65535 when increasing, it will be regarded as 0.

If it is less than 0, it will be regarded as 655XX.

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

The communication cable is the same as S7 200 series (RS-485). Please refer to the Connections of S7 200

series (RS-485).

RS-485

via PLC MPI Port (RS-485)

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-485)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male

(RS-485)

RXD+ (2) (3)TXD/RXD+

TXD+ (3)

RXD- (1)

TXD- (4)

GND (5) (5)SG

(8)TXD/RXD-

Top View

Pin1

Page 435: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-129

Taian TP02 PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 19200, 7, None, 1.

Controller station number: 1.

Control area/status area: V1 / V10.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

WORD_DEVICE_X Xn n: 1 ~ 384 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_Y Yn n: 1 ~ 384 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_C Cn n: 1 ~ 2048 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_V Vn n: 1 ~ 1024 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_D Dn n: 1 ~ 2048 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_WS WSn n: 1 ~ 128 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_WC WCn n: 1 ~ 912 N/A Word

WORD_DEVICE_X / WORD_DEVICE_Y / WORD_DEVICE_C: Address must be 1 or the multiple of

16+1.

Contacts

Read/Write Range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

BIT_DEVICE_X Xn N/A n: 1 ~ 384

BIT_DEVICE_Y Yn N/A n: 1 ~ 384

BIT_DEVICE_C Cn N/A n: 1 ~ 2048

BIT_DEVICE_SC SCn N/A n: 1 ~ 128

BIT_DEVICE_SC: Only 1 Bit can be transferred for each read command.

Page 436: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-130 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-422

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-422)

RXD+ (2) (3) TXD+

RXD- (1)

TXD+ (3)

(8) TXD-

(2) RXD+

(7) RXD-TXD- (4)

Top View

RS-485

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller RS-485 (T/R+, T/R-)

RXD+ (2) T/R+

TXD+ (3)

RXD- (1)

TXD- (4) T/R-

Pin1

Page 437: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-131

Vigor M Series Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 19200, 7, EVEN, 1.

Controller station number: 0.

Control area/status area: D0 / D10.

NOTE

1) Controller station number: 0 for PROGRAMMER PORT; 1 for COM PORT

2) VB series also can use this driver.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Read/Write Range Register Type Format

Word No. Bit No. Data length

Input Relay Xn n: 0 ~ 770 (Octal) N/A Word (multiple of 8)

Output Relay Yn n: 0 ~ 770 (Octal) N/A Word (multiple of 8)

Auxiliary Relay Mn n: 0 ~ 5112 N/A Word (multiple of 8)

Special Relay Mn n: 9000 ~ 9248 N/A Word (9000 + multiple of 8)

Step Relay Sn n: 0 ~ 992 N/A Word (multiple of 8)

Timer Present Value Tn n: 0 ~ 255 N/A Word

16-bit Counter Present Value Cn n: 0 ~ 199 N/A Word

32-bit Counter Present Value Cn n: 200 ~ 255 N/A Word

Data Register Dn n: 0 ~ 8191 N/A Word

Special Data Register Dn n: 9000 ~ 9248 N/A Word

Contacts

Read/Write range Contact type Format

Word No. Bit No.

Input Relay Xn N/A n: 0 ~ 777(Octal)

Output Relay Yn N/A n: 0 ~ 777(Octal)

Auxiliary Relay Mn N/A n: 0 ~ 5119

Special Relay Mn N/A n: 9000 ~ 9255

Step Relay Sn N/A n: 0 ~ 999

Timer Contact Tn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Counter Contact Cn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Timer Coil TCn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Counter Coil CCn N/A n: 0 ~ 255

Page 438: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-132 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

RS-232

(PROGRAMMER PORT)

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male(RS-232)

Controller USB TAPE A Connector

Controller USB TAPE A Connector

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(4) GND

Top View

(COM PORT)

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB female (RS-232)

Controller 9 pin D-SUB female (RS-232)

RXD (2) (3) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) GND

Top View

4 3 2

Pin1

Page 439: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-133

VIPA PLC Back to Table

Its function is the same as Siemens S7 300 PLC (with PC Adaptor).

Page 440: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-134 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

YOKOGAWA ACE PLC Back to Table

A. HMI factory settings

Baud rate: 9600, 8, EVEN, 1. (ASCII code)

Controller station number: 1.

CPU NO. : 1.

Control area/status area: D1 / D10.

NOTE

1) CheckSum and End character (CR, LF) are not used during communication. Therefore, the controller

should be set to “Not using CheckSum and End character”.

2) CPU number is used during communication, however, Screen Editor software does not have this

selection. Therefore, if the user desires to set CPU number, please set HMI station number in “General”

tab in the ”Configuration” dialog box in “Options” menu (Options ”Configuration” General). (HMI

station number is regarded as CPU number. The default setting of HMI station number is 0, but 0 is an

illegal number, the user must set it as a legal value.

B. Definition of controller Read/Write address

Registers

Register Type Format Word No. Data Size

WORD_DEVICE_X Xn n: 201 ~ 65464 Word

WORD_DEVICE_Y Yn n: 201 ~ 65464 Word

WORD_DEVICE_I In n: 1 ~ 16384 Word

WORD_DEVICE_E En n: 1 ~ 4096 Word

WORD_DEVICE_L Ln n: 1 ~ 65488 Word

WORD_DEVICE_M Mn n: 1 ~ 9984 Word

WORD_DEVICE_TP TPn n: 1 ~ 3072 Word

WORD_DEVICE_CP CPn n: 1 ~ 3072 Word

WORD_DEVICE_D Dn n: 1 ~ 8192 Word

WORD_DEVICE_B Bn n: 1 ~ 32768 Word

WORD_DEVICE_W Wn n: 1 ~ 65499 Word

WORD_DEVICE_Z Zn n: 1 ~ 512 Word

WORD_DEVICE_V Vn n: 1 ~ 64 Word

WORD_DEVICE_R Rn n: 1 ~ 4096 Word

WORD_DEVICE_TS TSn n: 1 ~ 3072 Word

WORD_DEVICE_CS CSn n: 1 ~ 3072 Word

WORD_DEVICE_X / WORD_DEVICE_Y: The last two digits of address must be 1 or the multiple of

16+1 and less than 65.

Page 441: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007 1-135

WORD_DEVICE_I / WORD_DEVICE_E / WORD_DEVICE_L / WORD_DEVICE_M: Address must be 1

or the multiple of 16+1.

WORD_DEVICE_X / WORD_DEVICE_Y / WORD_DEVICE_L / WORD_DEVICE_W: Valid address is

inconsecutive.

Contacts

Contact type Format Bit No.

BIT_DEVICE_X Xn n: 201 ~ 65464

BIT_DEVICE_Y Yn n: 201 ~ 65464

BIT_DEVICE_I In n: 1 ~ 16384

BIT_DEVICE_E En n: 1 ~ 4096

BIT_DEVICE_L Ln n: 1 ~ 65488

BIT_DEVICE_M Mn n: 1 ~ 9984

BIT_DEVICE_TU TUn n: 1 ~ 3072

BIT_DEVICE_CU CUn n: 1 ~ 3072

BIT_DEVICE_X / BIT_DEVICE_Y : the last two digits of address must be less than 65 (1 ~ 64).

BIT_DEVICE_X / BIT _DEVICE_Y / BIT _DEVICE_L : valid address is inconsecutive.

Multiple Duplicate:

The next Bit address of X264 is X301 (invalid addresses X265 ~ X300 are skipped)

The next Bit address of X364 is X401.

The address of Y is the same as X.

(The Word addresses of X and Y also skip invalid addresses automatically)

C. Connections (Connector Pinouts)

It needs to use specific cable of YOKOGAWA ACE PLC.

RS-232

DOP 9 pin D-SUB male (RS-232)

Controller (6 pin) (RS-232 for YOKOGAWA)

Controller (6 pin) (RS-232 for YOKOGAWA)

RXD (2) (1) TXD

TXD (3)

GND (5)

(2) RXD

(5) GND Top View

Page 442: Dop-hmi Manuel Tr

Delta DOP Series HMI Connection Manual|DOP-A/AE/AS Series

1-136 Revision January, 2008, Doc. Name: 2007PDD23000007

This page intentionally left blank.